EXAM PAPERS PLUS BLOG > 11+
Founded in 1986, Burntwood School is a girls’ secondary school in Wandsworth, London. Although principally an all-girls’ school, the sixth form does have some male students. Refurbishments to the school were completed in 2014, which saw six new buildings, including teaching pavilions, a new sports hall and performing arts buildings. In 2013, the school gained Academy status and in 2015, it won the RIBA Stirling Prize for architecture.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Burntwood School, take a look at this short video:
Wandsworth Test Information for Burntwood School
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test
Before applying for a place at Burntwood School, parents and students are encouraged to attend an Open Day. The event provides attendees with the opportunity to view the campus and facilities and to meet current students and staff members. There will also be a guided tour of the school and a presentation from the school Principal. For more information on the open day events, parents can contact the school on 020 8946 6201 or by email at info@burntwoodschool.com.
Applications to Burntwood are made on the Secondary Transfer application form for the borough in which the student lives. Burntwood School should be listed as one of the student’s preferences. For example, students in Wandsworth should apply using the Wandsworth form, and those that live in another borough like Merton, should apply using the Merton form.
Additionally, parents need to complete a Common Application Form for the local authority in which they live. The CAF can be completed online, here. Late applications will be accepted but will only be considered after the initial offer date.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Burntwood School Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
In cases where there are more applicants than available places at Burntwood, the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine priority.
In the first instance, places are offered to students with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or Education Health and Care Plan. Remaining places are then allocated as follows:
78 places are allocated by general ability to students with the highest results in the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. The remaining 35 places are allocated in the following order:
- Looked After, or previously Looked-After children.
- Students with exceptional medical or social needs.
- Students who have a sibling that currently attends the school.
- Students who live closest to the school.
Burntwood School, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
Burntwood School uses the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of its admissions process. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each applicant’s academic ability. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes a non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long), and a verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long).
Before each test begins, students will be given a short practice section. There will also be a break between the two tests. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format.
Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Burntwood School Wandsworth Year 6 11 plusTest. Our papers are specifically designed to help students become familiar with the layout of competitive entry tests and the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.
The resources listed below will be particularly useful in improving the confidence of students who are preparing for the Burntwood Year 6 Test. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers and should be taken under exam conditions.
11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Established in 1818, Reading Girls’ School is a partially selective, bilateral school for girls in Reading, Berkshire. Approximately 430 girls are educated by 25 staff members. The school is known for its focus on business and enterprise. Students are encouraged to strive for excellence academically and socially and the curriculum offers a broad range of subjects and extra-curricular activities. Although not a grammar, Reading Girls’ does use an 11 Plus-style entrance test as part of its admissions process.
For a virtual tour of the school, take a look at this short video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Reading Girls’ School
Address: Reading Girls School, Northumberland Avenue, Reading, RG2 7PY
County: Reading
Admissions Info: admin@readinggirlsschool.net, 0118 986 1336
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 430 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (42 by selective stream)
Open Day Date: March
Exam Date: October
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Selective Stream Test, of which there are 42 allocated places. The school also offers entry via the Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme.
Admission to Reading Girls’ School in Year 7 follows the process set out by Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme, which is responsible for setting the school’s admissions policy. Each year, the school admits approximately 170 places, 42 of which are selected based on ability.
Students who have a Special Educational Needs or an Education, Health and Care Plan are given priority of place above other students.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked After and previously Looked After girls.
- Students who score highest in the selection test.
- Girls who have medical or social grounds for attending the school.
- Girls who have a sister who currently attends the school.
- Students who live closest to the school.
For further details about Reading Girls’ School admission process, please visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus (11+) Selective Entry to Reading Girls’ School
Before applying for a place at Reading Girls’ School, parents and students are encouraged to attend the school’s Open Day, which usually takes place in March. At the event, parents and students will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet current staff and students.
Once parents have visited the school and are sure that Reading Girls’ is the right establishment for their daughter, applications should be made to the appropriate Local Authority (LA), or submitted online. The application form can be downloaded here.
Students who wish to apply for one of the 42 selective places, should also complete the school’s registration form, which can be accessed here.
Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test (11 Plus Exam) Format
Of the 170 available places at the school, 42 are allocated to students who score the highest in the Selective Stream Test. The exam takes place in October and is administered by the exam board, GL Assessment.
There are three test papers in total, comprising of:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Mathematics
Each test is in multiple-choice format and results will be sent to parents before the end of October. Place allocations will be made at the beginning of March.
For more information on the Selective Stream Test, please visit the Selective Stream Test page on the school’s website.
How to Prepare for the Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?
A little forward planning can go a long way to helping students perform well in the Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test. As a starting point, we’d suggest that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents for an overview of what the test typically involves.
Once a study schedule is in place, using practice exam papers in addition to regular preparation can really help boost a student’s performance. Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout of the exam and the types of questions that may be asked on test day. They can also help identify any weak areas that may need improvement prior to the exam.
For girls due to take the Reading Girls School Selective Stream Test, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner:
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)
11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)
11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)
11+ Maths Problem Solving (GL-style)
The information provided about Reading Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established 1858, Badminton School is an independent, day and boarding school for girls aged 3 to 18. The school is located in Westbury-on-Trym, in Bristol and is named after Badminton House in Clifton, where it was founded. The school has a reputation for consistently performing well in secondary school league tables and in previous years has been ranked third in the Financial Times’ Top 1000 schools. The school aims to prepare its girls for living and working in a global society.
The Badminton School Cognitive Abilities Test (CAT) Information
Registration Closing Date: TBC
Exam Date: Mid–January
Exam Board Type: CAT and set by school
Results Date: End of January
Admissions Info: Badminton School
Badminton School Admissions Criteria
Badminton school encourages all prospective students to visit the school during one of its Open Days, or to arrange a private visit.
Once parents have visited the school, they can register their daughter for the assessment, which includes an online Cognitive Abilities Test. After the test has been taken, candidates are invited to a Taster Day, where they will meet other girls in their year group and experience the school environment.
The Candidate’s current school is then contacted for references and offer letters are sent out to parents shortly afterwards.
For more information on the admissions process at Badminton School, please visit the Admissions pages on the school website. Alternatively, parents can email admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk, or telephone 0117 905 5271.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Badminton School
Before applying for a Year 7 Place at Badminton School, students and parents are encouraged to attend the Open Morning, which takes place in March (attendance also forms part of the school’s oversubscription criteria). At the event, girls and their parents will have the opportunity to take a tour of the school and meet staff members. Open Morning places can be booked in advance here.
After visiting the school, parents should complete the school’s online registration form and pay a registration fee of £50 for Day Girls and £150 for Boarders.
Badminton School Year 7 CAT Assessment
Year 7 entry to Badminton School is determined by student performance in an online Cognitive Abilities Test, as well as written exams in Maths and English. These assessments take place in January
As part of the admissions process, candidates are also invited to attend an interview with a senior member of staff. References are then requested from the girl’s current school.
Results are sent to parents by post or email and offer letters are sent out approximately two weeks after the assessment date. Parents are then asked to accept the offer and pay the acceptance deposit before the deadline.
How to Prepare for the Badminton School 11 plus Entrance Test
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way to helping students pass their entrance exams. As the written element of the Badminton School entrance test focuses on Maths and English, we would recommend that students get acquainted with the types of questions they may face on test day. The following eleven plus practice papers will help students get used to answering similar questions and build the skills required to do well in 11 plus exams:
If your order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your total.
Online Practice for the Badminton School 11 Plus CAT Entrance Test
The Badminton assessment process also requires students to take an online CAT test. On our sister site, Pretest Plus, we have two online practice tests available that are specifically designed to help students prepare for online cognitive ability tests:
These online tests will help students familiarise themselves with the question types and formats that come up frequently in CAT tests. Once each module is complete, it will be marked automatically and students can then review each question with detailed explanations provided for each question.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Please note that Exam Papers Plus and Pretest Plus are independent publishers of practice tests and are not affiliated with or endorsed by any other test publisher.
There are currently 5 schools that use the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of their 11 Plus admissions process. Some of the schools use the test exclusively, whereas others use it in conjunction with their own aptitude exams.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wandsworth Schools
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test
Before registering for a place at any of the five schools that use the Wandsworth Test as part of their entry process, students and parents are encouraged to visit their preferred school during one of its open events. Typically, these events include a tour of the school, the opportunity to meet staff and current students, and learn more about the school’s admissions process.
Pupils who attend a state primary school in Wandsworth are automatically registered to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test at their current school.
Parents only need to register their child if they are applying for a place at one of the five schools listed above and they attend an independent school, or a state primary school outside of Wandsworth.
Online registration forms are available from the Wandsworth Local Authority website from July, and the closing date for applications is early September. Some schools also require parents to complete a supplementary application form.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Wandsworth Schools, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
The Wandsworth Year 6 Test is designed to provide Wandsworth schools with an indication of a student’s academic ability. Students who have a statement of Special Educational Needs do not have to take the test.
The test is prepared by GL Assessment and has two parts:
- A non-verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 55 minutes.
- A verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 50 minutes.
There will be a short practice session before each test and a break between the two parts. For both sections, students are given a pre-printed answer sheet to complete, laid out in a similar format to a multiple-choice test. There is no extended writing involved.
Scores are marked electronically and are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an unfair advantage. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test
Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources to help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. We have a range of practice papers that are specifically designed to help students familiarise themselves with the types of Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.
Students currently preparing for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test will find the resources below particularly useful. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test, so your child can approach their exam with confidence. Each practice test is timed so your child can get used to working under time pressure. Answers are included.
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)
11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)
11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
The London Consortium have released a new website with further information about their shared examination process. This information indicates that the exam will be created for them by the publishing board CEM.
The exam is therefore likely to share a number of similarities with the 11+ exam that CEM creates for numerous grammar schools across the country. This is emphasized by the fact that the official familiarisation material provided for the London Consortium exam is identical to that provided for the 11+ CEM grammar school exam.
Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that are specifically designed to help students prepare for CEM exams, like the London Consortium 11 plus test..
Whatever your child’s current attainment level, investing some additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test is likely to improve their performance ahead of the actual exam. At a minimum, being familiar with the question types, as well as the specific ways that answers must be recorded in the London Consortium 11 plus exam, will help your child approach their assessment with confidence.
As the London Consortium assessment will focus on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we highly recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style for these three subjects. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need additional focus and improvement.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 1
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 2
These packs focus on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included in each pack. Pack 1 focuses on classical fiction and Pack 2 focuses on Non-Fiction.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
Please click on the links below to learn more about the admissions process at each of the schools in the London Consortium:
Notting Hill and Ealing High School
St. James Senior Girls’ School
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
Watford Grammar School for Boys (WGSB) is a partially selective academy located in Watford. With over 1,200 boys aged 11-18 on the school’s roll, it became a same-sex school in 1884.
Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Boys is one of the highest-achieving state schools in England in terms of exam results. Pupils are taught a stimulating academic curriculum and offered numerous extracurricular activities, clubs and excursions throughout the school year.
11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Boys
Address: Watford Grammar School for Boys, Rickmansworth Road, Watford WD18 7JF
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: dunsbyr@watfordboys.org, 01923 208900
School Type: Boys, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,265 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 224
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To apply a Year 7 place Watford Grammar School for Boys, parents must complete the School Information Form (SIF) and the Secondary Transfer (or Common Application) Form for the local authority (LA) in which they are resident. For residents living in Hertfordshire, the LA is Hertfordshire County Council. Parents must also register their son with the South West Herts Consortium. It is essential that all forms are completed and returned no later than the closing date, as late applications will not be considered.
WGSB offers 146 community places in Year 7 and 78 specialist places. The school is heavily oversubscribed and has a clearly-defined admissions criteria.
The oversubscription criteria for community places gives priority to:
- Looked After, or previously Looked After, children
- Boys whose normal home address is nearest to the school and who would not be allocated a place under any other criterion
- Boys with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
- Boys with a sibling (brother) enrolled at the school
- Boys with a sibling (sister) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Girls
- Boys who live closest to the school
The oversubscription criteria for specialist places gives priority to:
- Boys selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
- Boys selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
For more information about the full admissions process at WGBS, visit the Year 7 admissions pages on the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Boys
To apply for a Year 7 place at WGSB, parents are advised to register their son with the South West Herts Admissions Consortium in the first instance.
Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium. Return the completed form to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
The Consortium receives a number of registrations that are invalid or ineligible. Before registering, parents are advised to thoroughly check their child’s eligibility for entry. Failure to do so may result in disappointment.
Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
Watford Grammar School for Boys adheres to Hertfordshire’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and as such, the academic exam consists of the following tests:
- Maths paper set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM
The mathematics test is around 50 minutes long, with the Verbal Reasoning lasting approximately one hour.
The academic tests have been specially devised for the Consortium schools and no minimum score will be required to gain admission. Places are offered strictly in descending order of candidates’ standardised test scores.
How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
When it comes to the WGBS eleven plus exam, preparation is key. A small amount of regular and focused preparation can go a long way.
Parents can give their son the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at WGBS by incorporating practice papers into their study sessions. Using these papers can increase the chances of securing a Year 7 place at the school by helping students familiarise themselves with the types of questions they will be asked.
In the lead up to the exam, we’d advise students to take our practice papers under exam conditions to improve their time management skills and get them used to answering all the questions within the allocated time.
For the Watford Grammar School for Boys eleven plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Watford Grammar School for Girls (WGGS) is an academy for girls aged 11-18. Based in Watford, it is a partially selective school, with 25% of pupils admitted on academic ability and 10% of musical aptitude.
Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Girls is a high-achieving school. Girls enjoy a balanced and broad academic curriculum in an effort to ensure each child achieves her own personal, academic and professional goals. Extracurricular activities play a vital role in the girls’ time at WGGS, with a variety of clubs and societies available. Year 7 students are encouraged to take part in at least three clubs per week to both broaden their interests and to make new friends.
11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Girls
Address: Watford Grammar School for Girls, Lady’s Close, Watford WD18 0AE
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admin@watfordgirls.herts.sch.uk, 01923 223 403
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,266 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 210
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To be admitted into Year 7 at Watford Grammar School for Girls, parents must send a completed Supplementary Information Form (SIF) form to the school. These forms are usually available from September. A Common Application Form (CAF) form should also be completed and returned to the Local Authority (LA), with Watford Grammar School for Girls as a named school. The CAF will also be available from September.
Parents should also register their daughter with the South West Herts Consortium. Please note that this is not an application form for a particular school, so both the SIF and CAF must be completed. Late applications will not be accepted.
WGGS has 137 community places and up to 73 specialist places available for Year 7. There are often more applications than available places, in which case, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked After, or previously looked after, children
- Girls whose normal home address is nearest to the school
- Girls with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
- Girls with a sibling (sister) enrolled at the school
- Girls with a sibling (brother) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Boys
- Students who live closest to the school
- Girls selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
- Girls selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
For further details about Watford Grammar School for Girls’ admission process, please visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Girls
Once parents have completed both the SIF and CAF, they should register their child for the 11 Plus exam via the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations can be returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Parents should check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering, as failing to do so may result in disappointment.
Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Watford Grammar School for Girls follows the Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme for Hertfordshire.
Prospective pupils will be required to take the following exams:
- Maths paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper, lasts approximately one hour and is set by CEM
How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
With some forward-planning and regular study sessions, students will be well prepared come exam day. A little bit of regular preparation can go a long way! We’d recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.
Using practice exam papers as part of an 11+ study routine can really help improve a student’s performance. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the exam layout and the question types. They can also help identify any weaker areas, allowing them plenty of time to improve.
For those sitting the Watford Grammar School for Girls eleven plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1862, St Clement Danes School is a co-educational, partially selective academy based in the Hertfordshire village of Chorleywood. Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school educates over 1,300 pupils aged between 11 and 18. St Clement Danes is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium and offers a varied curriculum and broad extra-curricular timetable.
The school is committed to a high quality pastoral care programme and also has an active wellbeing programme, focusing on building students’ resilience and mental strength.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Clement Danes School
Address: St Clement Danes School, Chenies Road, Chorleywood, WD3 6EW
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admissions@stclementdanes.herts.sch.uk, 01923 284169
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,336 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 240
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
Admission to St Clement Danes School is handled through the Secondary Transfer process. To apply for a Year 7 place, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online and once completed, parents can view all exam dates and locations.
St Clement Danes is a popular school and is usually oversubscribed at Year 7. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in public care
- Children with a sibling attending the school
- Children of school staff
- Distance from home to school
For a full explanation of the school’s oversubscription criteria, please consult the admissions policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Clement Danes School
To apply for 11+ entry to St Clement Danes School, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online at any time during the registration period. Late registrations will not be accepted under any circumstances.
Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium and returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Parents should always check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering in order to avoid disappointment.
St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Exam Format
St Clement Danes School follows the county’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme.
Prospective pupils will sit the following exams:
- Maths – this is set by GL Assessment and lasts for approximately 50 minutes
- Verbal Reasoning – set by CEM and lasts for approximately one hour
How to Prepare for the St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Exam?
The build-up to the St Clement Danes 11+ test can be an anxious time, but with some forward-planning and regular study sessions, preparation needn’t disrupt the usual routine.
Students should give themselves plenty of time for revision sessions. They should avoid trying to cram in a few sessions the week before the test. Pupils should adopt a steady approach to exam revision over a longer period of time to give them the best chance of performing well.
Parents should encourage their child to include 11 Plus practice papers in their study routine. Set these papers under timed conditions to give them practice of answering questions quickly and under pressure. This is a really efficient way to help studnets improve whilst identifying any weak areas that could do with a little more focus.
For the St Clement Danes School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about St Clement Danes School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Parmiter’s School is a co-educational state school with academy status. Located in Hertfordshire, Parmiter’s is partially selective and a member of the South West Herts School Grammar School Consortium.
Over 1200 pupils attend the school and are divided into six houses that are named after benefactors and Old Parmiterians: Beven, Carter, Lee, Mayhew, Renvoize and Woolley. All students are encouraged to take part in a wide variety of academic, cultural and sporting House events throughout the year. Parmiter’s School is one of the highest-performing in the UK and is currently the most oversubscribed school in Hertfordshire.
11 Plus Exam Information for Parmiter’s School
Address: Parmiter’s School, High Elms Lane, Garston, Watford WD25 0UU
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admissions@parmiters.herts.sch.uk, 01923 671424
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,245 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 208
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Admissions
To apply for a Year 7 place at Parmiter’s School, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Parents must also complete the school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF) and return it to the school. The form can be downloaded from the school’s admissions page. Applicants must also complete and return Hertfordshire County Council’s Common Application Form (CAF), ranking up to four schools in order of preference.
Parmiter’s School is almost always oversubscribed. When there are too many applicants for the places available, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked After, of previously Looked After children
- Students who live closest to the school, using Hertfordshire County Council’s ‘straight line’ distance measurement system (up to 10 percent of places)
- Children with a sibling at the school
- Children with special educational needs, or a health and care plan
Additionally, 25% of places are determined by academic merit, and 10% on the basis of proven aptitude in music
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Parmiter’s School
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To apply for eleven plus entry to Parmiter’s School, parents need to register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website during the registration window, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations should be returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Parents are advised to check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering in order to avoid disappointment.
Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
Hertfordshire operates a Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme, which includes partially-selective schools like Parmiter’s.
The exam consists of two tests:
- Maths paper set by GL Assessment (lasts approximately 50 minutes)
- Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM (lasts approximately one hour)
How to Prepare for the Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Exam?
Understandably, the eleven plus exam can make students and parents a little anxious. To help alleviate any concerns, we’d advise that parents help their children create a thorough revision timetable in the lead-up to the test. Preparing the timetable early will give students the best possible chance of gaining a place at Parmiter’s.
Parents may also find the following articles from our blog useful in helping their children prepare for the exam:
The sooner pupils begin studying for the exam, the sooner parents will be able to recognise any gaps in their knowledge. Our practice 11 plus papers are excellent for identifying a student’s strengths and weaknesses. Practice papers can also help pupils to familiarise themselves with the exam layout and the types of questions that they may be asked on exam day.
As the exam date draws closer, we would strongly recommend that students complete our practice papers under timed conditions to improve their time management skills.
We have a selection of eleven plus practice tests desgined to help pupils prepare for the Parmiter’s School 11 Plus exam:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Parmiter’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Dame Alice Owen’s School is a partially selective, co-educational secondary school with academy status. Located in the Hertfordshire town of Potters Bar, it was founded in Islington as a boys’ school in 1613. The school gradually expanded and a girls’ school was built in 1886 before the two merged in 1973.
Dame Alice Owen’s is one of the UK’s highest-performing schools. It regularly produces excellent exam results at both GCSE and A-Level. The school also offers pupils an array of extracurricular activities, including music, sport and drama.
11 Plus Exam Information for Dame Alice Owen’s School
Address: Dame Alice Owen’s School, Dugdale Hill Lane, Potters Bar EN6 2DU
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admissions@damealiceowens.herts.sch.uk, 01707 643441
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,466 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 200
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and set by school
Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Prospective students and their parents are actively encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events before applying for a place. At the events, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff and current pupils.
Dame Alice Owen’s School is often oversubscribed for places, so the school uses the following criteria for places, giving priority to:
- Looked After, or previously Looked After children
- 22 children whose permanent home address is closest to the school at the date of application
- Children who have a sibling attending the school at the date of application
- Children demonstrating musical aptitude (up to 10 places)
- Up to 65 children selected by academic ability
- Children with a parent who is a member of staff at the school
- Children whose permanent home address is closest to the School
Read the full admissions policy for Dame Alice Owen’s School.
Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam takes place in September in the academic year prior to admission. The test is broken up into two parts, taken on two separate dates in September.
Part 1
- Verbal Reasoning – This consists of a 15-minute practice paper, followed by a 45-minute paper of 100 questions in standard format by CEM (University of Durham)
- English – One-hour comprehension paper in standard format and extended writing.
Part 2
- Mathematics – One-hour paper consisting of 50 questions in standard format
How to Prepare for the Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Exam?
We understand that the 11+ exam can cause some students anxiety; however, we have plenty of practice resources to help pupils prepare for the test. Students should start their revision plan early and include online practice papers to help identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
To give students the best possible chance of gaining one of Dame Alice Owens’ 200 places in Year 7, we would recommend using the following practice papers, broken down by section:
Verbal Reasoning
The Verbal Reasoning test is created by CEM, so the following resources will prove useful:
English
The Dame Alice Owens’ English test is very similar to that of an independent school, standard format exam covering comprehension and composition. As such, we recommend the following packs to help prepare for this:
The Dame Alice Owens’ Mathematics test is very similar to that of an independent school, standard format exam. As such, we recommend the following packs to help prepare for this:
The information provided about Dame Alice Owen’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1954, Rickmansworth School is a co-educational, partially selective secondary school that teaches over 1,200 students. The school is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium.
A Specialist Science and Arts College, Rickmansworth School provides a well-rounded education that encourages students to participate in a number of extracurricular activities outside of the classroom. Students can join a variety of different clubs and societies, including the science club, debating society and various musical ensembles.
11 Plus Exam Information for Rickmansworth School
Address: Rickmansworth School, Scots Hill, Rickmansworth WD3 3AQ
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admissions@rickmansworth.herts.sch.uk, 01923 773296
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,261 (approx.)
Number of Places available: 196
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Admissions – Academic Criterion
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To be considered for a Year 7 place at Rickmansworth School, prospective pupils must sit the 11 Plus entrance exam.
In the first instance, students must be registered with the South West Herts Consortium. Parents should also complete the school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF) for Secondary Transfer and return it directly to the school.
Rickmansworth receives an average of eight applications per available place in Year 7, so the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine which pupils will be given priority. The Rickmansworth School oversubscription criteria gives priority to:
- Looked after children and previously looked after children.
- Distance from the school (no more than 23 places to be allocated based on this criteria)
- Students who have a parent or guardian who is a permanent member of the school staff
- Children with a sibling at the school
- Children with a proven aptitude in music (no more than 23 places)
- 57 places will be available by reference to academic ability in descending order of merit
For a full breakdown of Rickmansworth School’s admission process, please visit the school’s website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rickmansworth School
To apply for eleven plus entry to Rickmansworth School, parents should register their child for the exams via the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations can be returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Please check your child’s eligibility for entry before registering.
Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Exam Format
Rickmansworth School follows the Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme for Hertfordshire.
Prospective pupils will be required to take the following exams for an academic place:
- Maths paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper, lasts approximately one hour and is set by CEM
How to Prepare for the Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Exam?
We’d recommend that students who are due to take the Rickmansworth School Scondary Transfer Test should create a thorough revision timetable well ahead of the test day. The more prepared pupils are ahead of the exam, the better chance they’ll have of gaining one of the Year 7 places at the school.
It’s likely that students will have to commit extra time to revision sessions, so if parents notice that their child is struggling to get motivated, consider introducing fun revision games.
Practice exam papers are an effective way to prepare for the Rickmansworth School eleven plus exam. At Exam Papers Plus, we produce practice papers to help students become familiar with the types of questions they may be asked on exam day. Our papers can also improve students’ time management skills, especially if taken under exam conditions.
For the Rickmansworth School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources to help prepare:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Rickmansworth School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1969, Queens’ School is a partially selective, co-educational secondary school with academy status. The school specialises in sports and science and educates 1700 pupils. It aims to develop each student’s potential, whether in academics, sports or music.
Queens’ School is the largest school in Hertfordshire and is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium. Students are split into four houses and take part in various sporting, musical and academic activities throughout the school year.
11 Plus Exam Information for Queens’ School
Address: Queens’ School, Aldenham Road, Bushey WD23 2TY
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: office@queens.herts.sch.uk, 01923 224465
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1700 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 265
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Queens’ School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
Applications for Year 7 places at Queens’ School are submitted via the Hertfordshire Education Authority using the Secondary Transfer Form (STF). Parents also need to complete a Queens’ School Application for Admission Form (SIF) and register with the South West Herts Consortium. It is essential that all forms are completed and returned no later than the closing date.
In the event that the school is oversubscribed in Year 7, the following students will be given priority:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children with a sibling attending the school at the time of admission
- Children whose permanent residence is located within postcodes laid out in the school’s admission policy document
- Children with a particular aptitude in sport (up to 13 places)
- Children with a particular aptitude in music (up to 13 places)
- Up to 92 places based on merit, based on the results of the assessment test
- Distance to the school
For more information about the full admissions process at Queens’ School, parents should visit the admissions pages on the school’s website
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queens’ School
To apply for Year 7 entry to Queens’ School, parents must first register their child with the South West Herts Admissions Consortium. Students can then be registered for the school’s entrance tests online.
Parents can also collect a registration form from the school and return the paper version to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Before registering, parents should thoroughly check their child’s eligibility for entry.
Queens’ School 11 Plus Exam Format
Queens’ School adheres to Hertfordshire’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and as such, the exam consists of the following tests:
- Maths paper set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM
The mathematics test last for around 50 minutes, while the Verbal Reasoning is approximately one hour. Students will have a short break between tests.
Queens’ School also offers places to students with exceptional sporting ability on the condition that students live within the designated catchment area. Eligible students are required to take the PE Aptitude Test, which covers the core movement skills. The tests have been selected by the Council of European Physical Fitness.
How to Prepare for the Queens’ School 11 Plus Exam?
To maximise the chance of success in the Queens’ School 11 Plus exam, students must be well-organised. The more time pupils spend preparing, the lower their stress levels will be as the exam date approaches. As a starting point, we’d recommend that parents review our 11 Plus guide for parents, which provides an overview of the exam and what to expect from the process from start to finish.
Queens’ School tends to be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so students should start their exam revision early to improve their weaker subject areas. Practice test papers are an ideal way of preparing for the 11 Plus exam at Queens’. At Exam Papers Plus, our papers help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and help improve their time management skills.
For the Queens’ School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources to help your child prepare:
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Queens’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St James Senior Girls’ School is an independent day school for girls aged 11-18. Based in London’s Kensington Olympia, the senior school accommodates a two-form year group, allowing teachers to focus more closely on pupils’ wellbeing and progress.
The school aims to provide a happy, united environment for its girls, giving them the best chance of seeking out and developing their individual talents. The school provides spiritual enrichment to its pupils by setting aside regular time to meditate or be still at the beginning and end of each school day.
St. James Senior Girls’ School 11 plus exam Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
St. James Senior Girls’ School Admissions Criteria
St James Senior Girls’ School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice for admissions.
The main entry point to St James Senior Girls’ School is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. However, the school does not select candidates solely for the academic results they achieve. Rather, prospective pupils may be asked to attend an interview, which is intended to help the school ensure that it can meet the student’s needs. A report is also requested from the girl’s current school.
The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference.
For further information on St James Senior Girls’ School Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7348 1748 or admissions@sjsg.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to St. James Senior Girls’ School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at St James Senior Girls’ School, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events. These events take place throughout the school year and need to be booked in advance.
To register for the Cognitive Abilities Test, parents need to download and return both the Registration Form and Confidential Pupil Information Form to the school, together with two recent passport photographs and a non-refundable registration fee of £125. A confirmation letter acknowledging receipt of the documentation will be sent to parents.
St. James Senior Girls’ School Year 7 entry Eleven Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the St. James Senior Girls’ School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
South Hampstead High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
St. Helen’s School London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Located in Northwood, London, St. Helen’s School was founded in 1899 as an independent day school for girls aged 3-18. Situated on a 21-acre estate, St. Helen’s offers high quality, spacious facilities to its 1,100 pupils.
Students are strongly encouraged to engage in new experiences and take advantage of the school’s extensive co-curricular opportunities, which include an array of sports, music and drama. From Year 10 upwards, girls can also join a local Combined Cadet Force, opting for Royal Navy, Army or RAF Section.
St. Helen’s School London Cognitive Abilities Test Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
St. Helen’s School London Admissions Criteria
As one of the 12 schools that currently make up the London Consortium, St Helen’s School, London follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
The main entry point to St Helen’s School is in Year 7 and students must take the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview with senior staff members at the school. The interview aims to give staff a better of idea of whether a pupil is suited to St Helen’s.
A reference is also requested from the pupil’s current school.
Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone. The school considers a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference.
For further information on St Helen’s School Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Admissions team on 01923 843230, or email admissions@sthelens.london.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to St. Helen’s School London
St Helen’s School encourages parents and prospective pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for the entrance exam. If parents are unable to attend one of the events in June or September, individual visits can be arranged. At these events, parents can meet the Headteacher, staff members and current pupils. A tour of the school’s extensive facilities is also offered.
To register for the Cognitive Abilities Test, download and complete this form. Parents will receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. For more information on the registration process, consult the school’s FAQs section.
St. Helen’s School London Year 7 entry, 11 plus exam
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the St. Helen’s School London 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Queen’s Gate School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
South Hampstead High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1876, South Hampstead High School is an independent day school for girls, situated in north west London. The school educates approximately 900 girls aged 4-18 and is one of the UK’s most successful schools.
Alongside a challenging, stimulating academic timetable, students are encouraged to be creative and tenacious. The school offers pupils a wide extracurricular timetable, enabling its pupils to pursue activities that boost their overall wellbeing.
South Hampstead High School Cognitive Abilities Test Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
South Hampstead High School Admissions Criteria
South Hampstead High School is part of the London Consortium alongside 11 other independent schools. Each school administers the same entrance test paper and releases the results on the same day. South Hampstead High School also adheres to the Consortium’s Agreed Code of Practice.
For 11+ entry from September 2019 onwards, all schools in the London Consortium now use a Cognitive Abilities Test, replacing the previous English and Mathematics 11+ entrance examinations. The CAT lasts for 75 minutes and is designed to identify academic potential and reduce the reliance on learning by rote.
Admission to South Hampstead High School isn’t determined by exam results alone. prospective pupil must also attend an interview at the school after the exam date. This interview is an important part of the school’s selection process and aims to identify whether a pupil will thrive at the school. Places are then offered on the basis of their performance in the Cognitive Abilities Test and interview, as well as the reference from their current school.
For further information on South Hampstead High School’s Year 7 admissions process, please call the main office on 020 7435 2899, or email senioradmissions@shhs.gdst.net.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to South Hampstead High School
Before applying for a place at South Hampstead High School, parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events. At these events, parents can take a tour of the school and attend a talk from the headteacher. To book a place at one of the Open Events, parents should apply online, via the school’s website.
To register students for the Cognitive Ability Test, download and complete this registration form. The form should be returned ahead of the deadline in November, alongside a non-returnable examination fee of £125. Once parents receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, she will be eligible to take the entrance test in January.
For more information on the registration process, the school website has a useful FAQs section.
South Hampstead High School Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the South Hampstead High School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Queen’s College London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Queen’s Gate School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Located in South Kensington, Queen’s Gate School was founded in 1891 as an independent day school for girls aged 4-18 years. With a strong academic reputation, the school is relatively small in size, with just over 500 girls attending at any one time.
While the school promotes a love of learning, it also actively encourages its girls to push themselves when outside of the classroom, with a variety of extracurricular activities. Many of the girls participate in charitable work, both in their local community and further afield, while maintaining their academic curriculum.
Queen’s Gate School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Queen’s Gate School Admissions Criteria
Queen’s Gate is one of the 12-member schools that make up the London 11 Plus Consortium. As such, Queen’s Gate must follow the Consortium’s formal Code of Practice.
Year 7 is a main entry point to Queen’s Gate School and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview after the exam date, which gives them an opportunity to showcase their intelligence and creativity in a conversation with school staff. A reference is also requested from the girl’s current school.
It is The London Consortium’s policy to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference. Therefore, entry to Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone. Queen’s Gate School will consider all three elements before deciding on place allocation.
If you have any further questions about Queen’s Gate School’s Year 7 admissions process, simply contact the Registrar on 020 7594 4982, or email registrar@queensgate.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Queen’s Gate School
The London Consortium has made applying to Queen’s Gate relatively easy for those applying for a Year 7 place. However, before a registration form is submitted, Queen’s Gate encourages parents to book a place on one of their Open Events, which take place September to November. You can register for a place at one of these events online.
After attending an event, if parents feel that Queen’s Gate is the right learning environment for their daughter, they should download and complete the registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test.
For all outstanding application questions, please refer to Queen’s Gate FAQs section online.
Queen’s Gate School Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Queen’s Gate School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Queen’s College London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1848, Queen’s College London is an independent school for girls aged 11–18 and is located in the City of Westminster. In 1853, the College received a Royal Charter from Queen Victoria and, since then, the Patron of the College has always been a queen.
The College educates over 500 girls and provides a liberal education. The College aims to provide each of its pupils with the skills to be self-confident and authoritative. Queen’s offers an extensive co-curricular timetable, including art, music and drama and takes full advantage of being situated in the heart of the UK’s capital.
Queen’s College London Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 plus exam information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Queen’s College London Admissions Criteria
Queen’s is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
The main point of admission to Queen’s College is at 11+, where there is a three-form entry.
Year 7 admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January, prior to entry in September the same year. All candidates are invited to attend an interview and a reference is requested from the candidate’s current school.
In line with the London Consortium’s policy, the College offers places based on exam results, interview performance and the school reference. The College looks at all three of these areas to gauge a candidate’s potential.
For further information on Queen’s College London’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 0207 291 7070, or email admissions@qcl.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Queen’s College London
Before applying for an eleven plus place at Queen’s College, parents should attend one of the Open Days, which take place throughout the academic year. Visitors will have the opportunity to meet the Principal, speak to staff members and take a tour of the College.
Parents can download and complete the registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test from the school website. The completed form should be returned to the school with a registration fee of £150, a passport photograph and a copy of your daughter’s birth certificate.
For more information on the registration process, please refer to the school’s FAQs document.
Queen’s College London Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Queen’s College London 11 Plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Northwood College 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Established in 1873, Notting Hill and Ealing High School (NHEHS) is an independent girls’ school for pupils aged between 4 and 18. Located in Ealing, London, the junior and senior schools educate nearly 900 girls combined. A popular school in the area, it produces consistently good exam results.
The school’s primary aim is to provide its students with an excellent academic and extracurricular education. Girls are taught a challenging curriculum to stimulate their learning, but always in a supportive environment. NHEHS puts student wellbeing at the heart of everything it does and, as such, provides excellent pastoral care. The school has a Personal, Social, Health, Citizenship and Economic Education programme that enables each year group to tackle issues tailored to their age.
Notting Hill and Ealing High School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Notting Hill and Ealing High School Admissions Criteria
Notting Hill & Ealing High School is part of the London 11+ Consortium. Currently comprising of twelve independent schools, all these schools use the same test paper, which is taken on the same date in all schools. As such NHEHS adheres to the Consortium’s Agreed Code of Practice.
Year 7 is the usual main entry point to NHEHS’s Senior School and admission is determined by student performance in the January entrance test. The school also requires prospective pupils to attend an interview as part of the Year 7 selection process. This interview, which usually takes place in January/February, aims to help the school to identify who will benefit most from attending NHEHS.
Year 7 places are offered based on student performance in both the entrance exam and the interview, plus a character reference from their current school will be taken into account.
For further information on NHEHS’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Admissions team on 020 8991 2165 or email enquiries@nhehs.gdst.net.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Notting Hill and Ealing High School
The best way to find out if Notting Hill and Ealing High School is the best educational environment for your child is to visit the institution. The school offers a selection of Senior School open days. If you would like to attend an upcoming event, please email the school’s Registrar at l.smith@nhehs.gdst.net.
Parents should register their daughter for the cognitive abilities test via this registration form. The form should be returned to the school alongside a non-refundable deposit of £125. Once a child is registered, they will be eligible to take the entrance test. The school offers lots of information about the 11 plus application process and has a useful FAQs document.
Notting Hill and Ealing High School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Northwood College 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
An independent day school for girls aged 3-18, Northwood College was founded in 1870. Located in Northwood, in the London Borough of Hillingdon, over 900 girls attend the school. The school has an excellent academic record and, in 2017, outperformed 95% of all UK schools for core subject GCSEs results.
The college places significant emphasis on growing each student as an individual, preparing them for leadership roles and teaching them how to take responsible risks. The college operates a house system with four houses – Briary, Buchan, Endsleigh and Heathfield. Each house goes head-to-head in a variety of sporting and academic events throughout the year.
Northwood College Cognitive Abilities Test Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Northwood College Admissions Criteria
Northwood College is a member of the London Consortium and as such, follows its Agreed Code of Practice for all admissions. Year 7 is one of the college’s main points of entry and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test. As per the other schools in the Consortium, the Northwood College entrance test takes place in January of the year of entry.
Pupils are required to sit the entrance exam and attend an interview at the college. In this interview, teaching staff will assess each child’s general intelligence and potential. Students must also be able to provide a character reference from their current school.
Year 7 places are offered based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference.
For further information on Northwood College’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 01923 845007 or email j.davidson@nwc.gdst.net.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Northwood College
Northwood College hosts a small number of open events for parents. These events give students and parents the opportunity to meet the college’s headteacher and view the Senior School on a normal school day. As places are strictly limited, parents are advised to call 01923 825446 to book a place.
To register your daughter at Northwood College, complete this application form in the first instance. Parents should receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. The college’s Consortium FAQs document offers parents further details about the application process.
Northwood College Year 7 entry, eleven plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Northwood College 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related Posts:
Godolphin and Latymer School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
More House School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1952, More House School is a Catholic independent girls’ school located in London’s Knightsbridge. The school gives its pupils the opportunity to learn in a caring environment; one that is full of challenges, but low in stress.
Due to its deep-rooted religious heritage, the school aims to foster spiritual growth among its students, while developing each girl’s potential during her school life. Pupils are divided among four houses: Canterbury, Iona, Santiago and Walsingham and girls remain in the same house throughout their time at the school. Houses take part in a number of competitive competitions throughout the academic year and girls can choose to participate in a range of extracurricular activities including drama, music and sport.
More House School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
More House School Admissions Criteria
As one of the 12 member schools that make up the London Consortium, More House School follows its Agreed Code of Practice for admissions. Year 7 admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.
In the autumn term, all prospective pupils who have registered for a Year 7 place will be invited to the school for a taster day. Alongside various classes, pupils will have a short, informal interview with the school’s headteacher. Pupils are encouraged to bring along an item of interest, a hobby or a piece of work they are particularly proud of to discuss.
It is the policy of The London Consortium to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference. This means Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone.
For further information on More House School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 0207 235 2855 or email office@morehousemail.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to More House School
In the first instance, parents are advised to request a prospectus for More House School. Parents can arrange individual visits to the school or attend a coffee morning event in May or June.
Parents can download a registration form for Year 7 entry via the school’s website. Parents are advised to register during the summer term, the year before admission is needed. Parents must submit the completed form alongside a non-refundable deposit of £125. The school also requires a passport photo of the applicant and a copy of the applicant’s birth certificate or passport.
For more information on the registration process, please read the school’s FAQs document.
More House School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the More House School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Godolphin and Latymer School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Whilst being very strong school academically, Godolphin and Latymer prides itself on delivering much more than excellent exam results. Girls are given the chance to pursue a range of activities and non-academic interests outside of the classroom. The school offers a broad range of extracurricular activities. The school’s excellent pastoral care works to develop the girls’ confidence, ensuring that they are grounded and have plenty of opportunities to shine.
Godolphin and Latymer School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 plus Exam
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Godolphin and Latymer School Admissions Criteria
Godolphin and Latymer School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
The main entry point to Godolphin and Latymer School is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.
Following the examination, prospective pupils will be assessed principally through an interview and must also provide references from their current school. However, the school may also take into account other relevant factors or circumstances before making a decision on allocating Year 7 places.
The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference(s). This means that Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone.
According to the school’s admissions policy, although they do accept siblings, admission is not guaranteed on this basis.
For further information on Godolphin and Latymer School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 8741 1936 or email registrar@godolphinandlatymer.com.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Godolphin and Latymer School
Before applying for an eleven plus place at Godolphin and Latymer School, parents must be sure that it is a good environment for their child. Attending one of the school’s open events in September or October is an opportunity to find out more about the school’s ethos and admissions process. Everyone is welcome at these events and you do not need to book a place, just turn up.
You can download a copy of the school’s registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test online. Complete the form and return it directly to the school, alongside a non-refundable free of £125.
For more information about the registration process, please refer to the school’s FAQs document.
Godolphin and Latymer School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Channing School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test
Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1881, Francis Holland School (SW1) is located in London’s Sloane Square and currently has 450 pupils on roll. An independent day school for girls, the school makes up one half of the Francis Holland School institution; the other is located close to Regent’s Park.
A Church of England school, Francis Holland (SW1) follows Christian beliefs, but is open to girls from all religious backgrounds. The school’s mission is to provide its students with a balanced education in a supportive and friendly community. Its curriculum is challenging and encourages pupils to be creative and curious, while its co-curricular timetable includes sports, languages and drama.
Francis Holland School (SW1) Cognitive Abilities Test, Exam Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Francis Holland School (SW1) Admissions Criteria
Francis Holland School (SW1) is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
For prospective pupils to be in with a chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Francis Holland School (SW1), they must sit the school’s 11+ entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview, which exists to explore a candidate’s current skill set and intellectual ability. Pupils must also supply a reference from their current school, providing a detailed commentary on their academic performance and character.
The school doesn’t place emphasis on one part of the application process alone. The examination, interview and reference are all considered equally important and complementary.
For further information on Francis Holland School (SW1)’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7824 5005, or email registrar@fhs-sw1.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Francis Holland School (SW1)
To apply for a Year 7 place at Francis Holland School (SW1), parents should contact the school directly and request an application form. Please note, that a separate application form needs to be completed for each school applied to, as schools process the applications individually.
For parents and students to get a better understanding of whether Francis Holland is the right environment, the school holds open events, which take place between September and November. These events include a talk from the Headteacher and a chance to meet current pupils and teaching staff.
For more information on the registration process, the school’s website has a useful FAQs section.
Francis Holland School (SW1) Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1878, Francis Holland School in Regent’s Park, London, is an independent day school for girls. The school makes up one half of the Francis Holland School institution; the other school is located near Sloane Square (SW1). The school has a strong academic reputation, while providing a caring and nurturing environment for its 450+ students. Teachers focus on building the girls’ self-confidence during their time at the school, giving them the independence to thrive in life after education.
Alongside a packed academic curriculum, students have countless opportunities to participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, such as sports, drama and music. Francis Holland School takes full advantage of its location in London, giving students the chance to regularly visit the capital throughout their school life.
Francis Holland School (NW1) Cognitive Abilities Test, 11+ Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Francis Holland School (NW1) Admissions Criteria
Francis Holland School (NW1) is one of 12 members of the London Consortium and as such, follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
Year 7 admission to Francis Holland School (NW1) is determined by student performance in the school’s 11+ entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Once the exam is complete, students are required to attend one or more interviews, designed to assess their general intelligence. Pupils must also provide both character and academic references from their current school as part of their application to Francis Holland.
Year 7 entry is not determined by student performance in the 11 plus exam alone. It is the policy of the London Consortium to consider overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference(s). Each of these assessment procedures will allow the school to gauge a student’s potential. Should the school have to decide between two or more candidates who meet the admission requirements, they may give preference to girls:
- who already have a sister in the school
- whose parent is a former pupil of the school
- whose parent is a current member of staff
- with a particular skill, talent or aptitude
- who are daughters of Church of England clergy
However, girls from the above list will not necessarily be given automatic priority.
For further information on Francis Holland School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7535 2777 or email registrar@fhs-nw1.org.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Francis Holland School (NW1)
Parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s open events, which take place from September to November. These events give parents the chance to ask current teaching staff questions about the admissions process and to also take a tour of the school with current pupils. Parents can book a place at one of the open events, here. Parents must request a registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test directly from the school.
For more information on the registration process, read the school’s FAQs document.
Francis Holland School (NW1) Year 7 Entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test
Founded in 1885, Channing School is an independent day school for girls located in Highgate, North London. Set in beautiful surroundings, Channing School consistently produces excellent exam results. In 2015, the Independent Schools Inspectorate awarded the school the highest possible judgements in its inspection.
The school is known for providing excellent pastoral care. When new girls join the school in Year 7, they are paired with a girl in Year 8, who offers support and guidance throughout their first year. Channing School also operates a house system where girls compete in academic and sporting events throughout the year. The four houses are: Sharpe, Spears, Waterlow and Goodwin. From Year 9, girls also have the opportunity to participate in the Duke of Edinburgh Award Scheme.
Channing School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Information
Registration Closing Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: February
Channing School Admissions Criteria
Channing School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.
The main entry point to Channing school is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.
After the examination, students are required to attend an interview, which is designed to assess creativity and broader forms of intelligence. The interview is intended to help the school ensure that it can meet the student’s needs. A reference is also requested from the girl’s current school.
The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference. Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone, and the school looks at the three areas very carefully to gauge each candidate’s potential.
Girls who currently have a sister at the school are given careful consideration but are not given automatic priority.
For further information on Channing School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 8340 2328, or email admissions@channing.co.uk.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Channing School
Before applying for a 11 plus place at Channing School, parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the Open Days from September to November. Parents and their daughters will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet with current pupils and staff. There will also be a talk given by the Head about Channing’s new admissions process. Parents can book a place at one of the Open Day events here.
Registration for the cognitive abilities test is completed online here. Parents will receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. For more information on the registration process, the school website has a useful FAQs section.
Channing School Year 7 Entry, 11 Plus Assessment
The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.
Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.
There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.
Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.
How to Prepare for the Channing School 11 plus Entrance Test
Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Related posts:
Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test
Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test
The 2018 Selective Eligibility Test will take place on Tuesday 18th September 2018.
The test will consist of two multiple-choice papers, testing Maths and English. Each paper will be about 45 minutes long.
The Selective Eligibility Test (SET) is used by a number of schools in the Surrey area. Click on the links below to learn more about the application process at each school:
Sutton Grammar School for Boys
Wallington County Grammar School
Wallington High School for Girls
Apart from at Wallington County Grammar School, students who pass the Selective Eligibility Test will be invited back for a second round test in October. This will assess Maths and English in a standard format, not multiple-choice.
We have produced a comprehensive set of resources to help you prepare for every element of the exam, including full-length practice tests and subject-specific, targeted exercises.
We have made our practice tests as accurate as possible, even replicating the style and format of the answer sheets so your child can get used to marking their answers exactly how they will need to do in the actual test.
You can currently take advantage of our special offer and save 30% off our 11+ Sutton bundle. This includes all the resources you will need to help your child prepare for both Round 1 (multiple-choice) and Round 2 (non-multiple-choice) of the exams. To take advantage of this offer, simply add all of the following products to your basket and enter the code suttondeal at checkout to save 30%!
Round 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
Round 2
For Round 2, we would recommend the following packs:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
We hope you find this offer beneficial. Don’t hesitate to get in touch if you have any questions or queries. We are always happy to help and advise!
Located in Wavertree, Liverpool, The Blue Coat School was established in 1708. Originally a boys’ boarding school, it became co-educational in 2002. Blue Coat is the only grammar school in Liverpool and educates almost 1,000 pupils aged 11-18.
In addition to offering a busy curriculum, The Blue Coat School has a variety of clubs and societies. Students are encouraged to explore their interests outside of the classroom by enrolling in extra-curricular activities and sports.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Blue Coat School
Address: The Blue Coat School, Church Road, Wavertree, Liverpool, L15 9EE
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: office@bluecoatschool.org.uk, 0151 733 1407
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 963 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Set by School
The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Admissions
With 180 Year 7 places available, admission to The Blue Coat School is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Eligibility for places will be based on the following criteria:
- Up to 27 places will be available to the highest scoring applicants who are eligible for free school meals and who achieve an entrance test score of 320 or more
- The remaining places will be available to all other highest scoring applicants
Should there be a tie for the last place(s), the Non-Verbal Reasoning score from the exam will determine the result.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Blue Coat School
The Blue Coat School administers its own 11+ test for Year 7. Parents can apply for a place online via the school’s admissions form – this will be available on the school’s website once registration is open.
Parents will receive test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.
The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Blue Coat School eleven plus exam consists of three tests:
- Mathematics – 45 minutes
- English – 50 minutes
- Non-Verbal Reasoning – 20 minutes
How to Prepare for The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Exam?
In the first instance, we would recommend preparing for the 11+ test well ahead of the exam date. The sooner children start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their performance on exam day.
Parents should create a study timetable with their child to ensure that they cover everything they will need to know. By introducing practice exam papers early into a student’s study routine, they will become more familiar with the exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked.
As the exam date gets closer, parents should encourage their child to do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This will help students get used to answering questions under time pressure, as will be required in the exam.
We specifically recommend the following resources for The Blue Coat School 11 Plus exam:
11 Plus Mathematics – Problem Solving
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)
The information provided about The Blue Coat School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1528, The King’s School is located in the Lincolnshire market town of Grantham. An all-boys’ grammar school, King’s has academy status and teaches pupils aged 11-18.
Over 1,000 pupils are split across six houses and the school offers them a diverse curriculum. It encourages its boys to participate in creatively-led enrichment activities including music, drama and art. The school also has an active Combined Cadet Force.
11 Plus Exam Information for The King’s School Grantham
Address: The King’s School, Brook Street, Grantham NG31 6RP
County: Lincolnshire
Admissions Info: admin@kings.lincs.sch.uk, 01476 563180
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,016 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 174
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
The King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Admissions
The King’s School Grantham is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. With 174 places available in Year 7, the school is often over-subscribed. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after children and all previously looked after children who have achieved the qualifying score (220 and above).
- Any remaining places will then be awarded in rank score order for those students who have qualified for entry, up to the total number of children intended to be admitted.
For more information about The King’s School admissions process, take a look at the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The King’s School Grantham
To apply for a Year 7 place at The King’s School, parents should visit their Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. They should then download and complete the school’s registration form to book their child’s place in the eleven plus exam.
Exam results will be sent to parents and guardians in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the parental preference form to the local authority. In March of the following year, the local authority will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.
The King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ test for The King’s School consists of two multiple-choice papers:
- Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
- Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Two of the five sections cover Spatial Reasoning.
How to Prepare for the King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Exam?
The King’s School, Grantham is a popular grammar in Lincolnshire, so children must be fully prepared for the eleven plus exam well ahead of test day. As the school’s entrance exam focuses on reasoning, we would recommend reading the following articles to gain a better understanding of what the tests involve:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice
Often, the build-up to the 11 plus can be more stressful than the actual exam. To boost your son’s confidence ahead of the test, incorporate practice exam papers into his revision timetable.
At Exam Papers Plus, we have a selection of 11+ practice tests that will help your son to prepare for The King’s School Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning entrance exams. We would specifically recommend the following packs:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about the King’s School Grantham was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1518, Cranbrook School is a co-educational grammar located in Cranbrook, Kent. It accepts pupils for both day and boarding school – however, as the school’s main point of entry is Year 9, no boarding school places are available at Year 7.
Cranbrook is consistently high-performing when it comes to exam results and prides itself on teaching its pupils to be independent. The school offers an array of extracurricular activities set outside of the classroom, including a Combined Cadet Force, Duke of Edinburgh Award Scheme and various community initiatives.
11 Plus Exam Information for Cranbrook School
Address: Cranbrook School, Waterloo Road, Cranbrook, Kent, TN17 3JD
County: Kent
Admissions Info: admissions@cranbrook.kent.sch.uk, 01580 711805
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 750 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 60 (day places only)
Open Day Date: May, September, October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test
Cranbrook School 11 Plus Admissions
Traditionally, Cranbrook’s main entry point for new students is Year 9, but it has recently opened up admissions to include more day places at Year 7. To be considered for one of these 60 places, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard.
Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events to ask any questions they have about the admissions process. Cranbrook hosts open events throughout the academic year, allowing parents to take a tour of the school and meet staff and current pupils.
With a relatively small number of places available at Year 7, the school is often oversubscribed. In such instances, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in (or previously in) Local Authority Care
- Children entitled to Pupil Premium without the priority area
- Children within the priority area who have proven social needs
- Children who live within the priority area
- Children who live outside of the priority area
For more information about Cranbrook’s 11+ admissions, simply visit the school’s website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Cranbrook School
Cranbrook School adheres to the coordinated admission scheme from Kent County Council, the LA. As Cranbrook uses the Kent Test as a means of selection in Year 7, parents must register online with the LA in the first instance.
Once students have taken the 11+ Kent Test, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to the LA. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive eleven plus results from the Council in October, with offers sent out in March.
Cranbrook School 11 Plus Exam Format
Cranbrook School requires pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:
- An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
- A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections: verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and spatial reasoning
Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task. However, this does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.
You can learn more about the Kent Test with these sample questions and gain further clarification on what to expect from the exam.
How to Prepare for the Cranbrook School 11 Plus Exam?
Kent is a hugely competitive grammar school region, with most (if not all) schools oversubscribed at Year 7. For your child to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 60 places at Cranbrook, they should invest additional time into studying and revising in the build-up to the test.
The Kent Test requires students to have a good knowledge of a range of subjects. If your child has a particular weak point, you can use practice exam papers to help improve it ahead of the test.
Students who are registered to take the Cranbrook School entrance test will benefit from these practice resources:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)
These tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.
For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also highly recommend these practice exam papers:
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about Cranbrook School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School is a co-educational grammar located in Ramsgate, Kent. In 2011, two schools – Chatham House Grammar School and Clarendon House Grammar School, merged to form the school as it’s currently known.
Maintaining the long history of the previous schools, Chatham and Clarendon blends its traditional surroundings with a modern outlook to learning. Students are assigned a house in Year 7 and remain part of it throughout their time at the school.
Almost 700 pupils are divided across four houses – Knight-Heath, Mann-Somerville, Rothschild-Pearce and Thomas-Sharman. Throughout each academic year, the houses go head-to-head in a range of activities and competitions.
11 Plus Exam Information for Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School
Address: Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, Chatham Street, Ramsgate, Kent CT11 7PS
County: Kent
Admissions Info: registrar@ccgrammarschool.co.uk, 01843 591075
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 700 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: June, October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus (GL)
Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 180 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in this entrance exam.
The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for a Year 7 place. At these events, parents can ask any questions they might have about the school’s curriculum and learning environment.
In case of oversubscription, Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School will give priority to:
- Students who are, or have been, in Local Authority Care
- Pupils who demonstrate health and special access reasons
- Applicants in receipt of pupil premium
- Students with a sibling at the school
- Pupils who live within the school’s catchment area
- Those living closest to the school
For more detail about the defined catchment area and oversubscription criteria, visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, parents must first register their child for the Kent Test. This can be done online via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.
The LA coordinates all Year 7 places, so parents are advised to contact them directly with any specific registration questions. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the LA in October and official places will be confirmed in March of the following year.
Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
To be considered for a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, all pupils must reach the required standard in the Kent 11 Plus test. Most selective grammar schools in the area adhere to this test.
The Kent eleven plus exam is split into three sections:
- The first section focuses on English and maths. Both subjects consist of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test. The test is multiple choice and is an hour long overall.
- The second sections tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning. It’s a multiple-choice test that lasts for one hour.
- The third section is a writing task that lasts for 40 minutes. Student performance in this task does not contribute to the overall 11+ score, but the paper may be used when looking at borderline cases, or during an appeals process.
How to Prepare for the Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
As Kent is an extremely competitive grammar school region, children sitting the Kent Test at eleven plus must be prepared. A ‘little and often’ approach is usually very effective, as manageable chunks are much easier for children to process, compared with longer revision sessions.
We strongly recommend that students use practice exam papers early-on in their revision as they enable parents to monitor their learning and identify any strengths and weaknesses.
For students to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, we would recommend using the following resources:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)
And for additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
The information provided about Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
King Edward VI Academy is a coeducational bilateral school located in the Lincolnshire market town of Spilsby. The school also has academy status. Regular funding has enabled the school to build modern facilities that offer pupils a range of opportunities, whether academic, vocational, artistic or sporting.
11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Academy
Address: King Edward VI Academy, West End, Spilsby PE23 5EW
County: Lincolnshire
Admissions Info: office@kingedwardacademy.co.uk, 01790 753260
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 417 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 95 (approx.)
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Admissions
Admission to King Edward VI Academy in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 85 places allocated to Year 7 students, although only around 30 of these are selective. The school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open evenings before applying for a place.
King Edward VI Academy is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and the Local Authority (LA), Lincolnshire County Council, coordinates the school’s admissions using the 11+ exam.
In cases where the school is oversubscribed, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
- Children who live closest to the school
- Children attending a named feeder school
You can find out more information about King Edward VI Academy’s admission process at Year 7 by visiting the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Academy
As an academy, King Edward VI operates under the LA’s admissions scheme. All Year 7 places are managed by Lincolnshire County Council. Once a child has taken the 11+ in September, results will be sent to parents by the LA in October.
Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) directly via the LA website. Failure to do so will mean your child will not be considered for a grammar school place in Lincolnshire.
King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Exam Format
Prospective pupils for King Edward VI Academy must sit two eleven plus tests. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:
- Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
- Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated to each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so. Two of the five sections cover Spatial Reasoning.
How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Exam?
To give children the best possible chance of achieving the required standard for Year 7 entry to King Edward VI Academy, revision should begin a few months ahead of the actual exam date.
The King Edward VI Academy 11 plus exam focuses on reasoning, so parents are advised to read the following articles ahead of scheduling revision sessions:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice exam papers to help boost students’ confidence. These papers provide students with a better understanding of what is required in the test.
Our 11 Plus practice tests help children prepare for the King Edward VI Academy exam. We would specifically recommend the following packs:
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about King Edward VI Academy was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in Newport, a market town in Shropshire, Newport Girls’ High School (NGHS) is a selective all-girls school with academy status. The school has specialist status in both maths and computing.
Students are split into three houses (Seacole, Roddam and Austen) and compete with each other in a range of activities throughout the academic year. The school holds a number of music events which showcase its chamber choir and orchestras.
11 Plus Exam Information for Newport Girls’ High School
Address: Newport Girls’ High School, Wellington Road, Newport TF10 7HL
County: Shropshire
Admissions Info: schooloffice@nghs.org.uk, 01952 797550
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 412 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 84 (approx.)
Open Day Date: May, October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions
Newport Girls’ operates its admissions arrangements and procedures in-line with the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton.
The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM eleven plus exam. Students must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. It should be noted though that attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee pupils a place at NGHS.
The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open day, where more information about the admissions process is provided.
Initial priority will always be given to girls who live within the school’s catchment area. However, in cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Candidates who live out of the catchment area
For more information about Newport Girls’ High School, please visit the school’s website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Newport Girls’ High School
Parents who wish to apply to NGHS should complete an online test registration form for the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton. This can be found via the school’s website when registration opens. Parents should also complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via their Local Authority website.
Parents will receive 11+ results in October and will be notified of official place offers in March of the following year.
Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam for Newport Girls’ High School assesses:
The four subjects are split over two tests that each last 45 minutes.
How to Prepare for the Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?
Although NGHS is a relatively small grammar school, it is popular and is regularly oversubscribed in Year 7, with an average of five applications for every place available. In order for students to have the best chance of gaining a place at the school, they must be committed to a structured revision timetable. This timetable will ensure that students cover everything they need to know for the exam, without being overworked.
Introducing practice exam papers into a student’s revision plan will help identify their strengths and weaknesses and improve their time management skills.
We have a selection of 11 plus practice exam papers that are highly recommended for students preparing for 11+ entry to NGHS:
- Eleven Plus CEM English Cloze Test (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM English Comprehension (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical ReasoningEleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus English Spelling (CEM)
The information provided about Newport Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established in 1817, Holcombe Grammar School is a grammar school based in Chatham, Kent. Previously known as Chatham Grammar School for Boys, it is now a selective academy. The school is fully co-educational from the end of 2018.
Students aged 11-18 are divided into four houses – Barfleur, Conquest, Guardian and Shannon – all named after ships built at Chatham Dockyard, not too far from the school campus. The houses compete against each other throughout the school year in an effort to secure the House Shield by the end of the summer term.
11 Plus Exam Information for Holcombe Grammar School
Address: Holcombe, Letchworth Avenue, Chatham, Kent, ME4 6JB
County: Kent (Medway)
Admissions Info: office@holcombegrammar.org.uk, 01634 830 083
School Type: Boys’ Grammar, Co-Educational by 2018
Number of pupils: 963 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 120
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)
Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
There are 120 places available in Year 7 at Holcombe Grammar School, with each place determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Prior to applying for a place, parents are advised to attend the school’s open event to get more information about the admissions process.
Along with the other grammar schools in Medway, Holcombe uses The Medway Test for Year 7 admissions. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school, while those living outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.
In the event of oversubscription, Holcombe Grammar School applies the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children who have a sibling attending the school
- Children who have a sibling attending any Trust primary school
- Children of staff employed by the Trust
- Child’s health reasons
- Children who live closest to the school
Schools within the Medway local authority (LA) use a different admissions criteria, so parents are advised to double check the exact specifications with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF). More details about Holcombe Grammar School’s admissions process is available on the school website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Holcombe Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), which is administered by the Medway local authority.
All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about registration. Alternatively, parents can call the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any pressing questions about the application process.
Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:
- A verbal reasoning test
- A maths test
- An English (extended writing) test
Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test often takes the form of an essay and lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.
In The Medway Test, the 11 plus maths and English sections are double-weighted in comparison to the verbal reasoning section. This means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score in the Medway 11 plus.
How to Prepare for the Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
The more preparation students put into the eleven plus, the less intimidating it will seem. We advise that students should plan ahead and make use of relevant practice resources.
Parents should encourage their child to complete 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions for the Medway Test as this will help them to establish a rhythm of answering questions quickly under time pressure.
For the Holcombe Grammar School 11+ exam, we would recommend the following resources:
11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about Holcombe Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
There are two selective grammar schools in Wiltshire; Bishop Wordsworth’s for boys and South Wiltshire for girls. For specific eleven plus details about each school, please read the articles below:
South Wiltshire Grammar School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Wiltshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: Bishop Wordsworth’s: July | South Wilts: September Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Bishop Wordsworth’s: CEM (University of Durham) | South Wilts: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Not made public
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Wiltshire County Council, 01225 713010
Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Both grammar schools in Wiltshire use the 11 Plus exam to determine Year 7 place allocation. As both schools are regularly oversubscribed, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend their chosen school’s open event before making an application – this helps to ensure that the school would be a good fit for the pupil.
Wiltshire grammar school admissions for Year 7 are coordinated through Wiltshire County Council. However, it is the responsibility of parents to ensure their child is registered for the eleven plus exam ahead of the exam date in September.
How to Register for the Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
In the first instance, parents must submit a Common Application Form (CAF) to Wiltshire County Council – this can be done online. Both schools in the region also require parents to complete a Supplementary Form, available from the school directly.
Students who live outside the Wiltshire region should submit the CAF through their own local authority, who will inform Wiltshire County Council of the application.
Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
While both Wiltshire grammar schools use the 11+ exam for Year 7 entry, they opt to use different providers. We have outlined the exam format for both entrance exams below:
Bishop Wordsworth’s School
Bishop Wordsworth’s 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting 50 minutes. Both papers test verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical ability. All papers are multiple-choice. The verbal reasoning section is likely to include comprehension and cloze, as per previous CEM exam papers.
South Wiltsshire Grammar
The South Wilts Grammar School for Girls eleven plus test consists of three multiple-choice papers that test maths, English and verbal reasoning. The scores from all three tests are standardised, combined and of equal weighting.
Practice Papers for the Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For pupils currently preparing for the Bishop Wordsworth eleven plus exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
- Eleven Plus CEM English Cloze Test: Pack 1
- Eleven Plus CEM English Comprehension: Pack 1
- Eleven Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning: Pack 1
- Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM: Pack 1
- Eleven Plus English Spelling
Girls preparing for the South Wilts grammar school 11 Plus exam will find the practice resources below most useful:
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Spelling (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
The information provided about Wiltshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are six grammar schools in Yorkshire, split across three Local Authorities. The schools below have been organised according to their boundaries. for 11+ information specific to each particular school, please click on the following links:
Calderdale
Kirklees
North Yorkshire
11 Plus Exam Information for Yorkshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: Calderdale – September, Kirklees – June, North Yorkshire – July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Calderdale and North Yorkshire – GL Assessment, Kirklees – CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies year to year
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June
Admissions Info: Calderdale Council, Kirklees Council, North Yorkshire Council
Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at a Yorkshire grammar school, pupils must pass the eleven plus exam. While some schools in the area are responsible for their own admissions, they must comply with the North Yorkshire Coordinated Scheme for secondary school admissions to Year 7.
The schools encourage prospective pupils and parents to attend an open evening during the academic year. Usually at these events, school staff will provide additional information about the admissions process and visitors will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet staff members.
How to Register for the Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Year 7 admission to any of the Yorkshire grammar schools is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. To enter for this exam, parents must register their child with their local authority (LA) before the closing date. Parents must also complete a Supplementary Information Form via the preferred school’s website.
Please note, late applications will only be considered once the initial round of allocations has been completed.
Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
For Calderdale schools:
Prospective pupils to both Crossley Heath Grammar School and North Halifax Grammar School must sit three tests at 11+. These tests cover English, mathematics and verbal reasoning. The maths paper is written by the school, while the Verbal Reasoning paper is created by GL Assessment.
For Kirklees:
Children will sit two exams, created by CEM (University of Durham) that test verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. Each paper contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions.
For North Yorkshire:
All three grammar schools in North Yorkshire set their own admissions policies. North Yorkshire Council manages admissions for Ermysted Grammar School and Ripon Grammar School. Skipton High School administers its own tests.
For Ermysted and Ripon:
The 11 Plus tests for both schools consists of two multiple choice papers that focus on both verbal and non-verbal reasoning.
For Skipton Girls:
Pupils will sit three tests that cover mathematics, English and verbal reasoning. All three exams are multiple choice and there is no extended writing exercise.
Practice Papers for the Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For Crossley Heath and North Halifax grammar schools, we would recommend the following resources:
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Maths: Pack 1
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Maths: Pack 2
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Maths: Pack 3
- 11+ Maths: Problem Solving
- 11+ Maths: Mental Arithmetic
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2
- 11+ (Grammar Schools) Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
For schools in the North Yorkshire authority, we would highly recommend these 11 Plus practice resources:
NB: For Ermysted Grammar School and Ripon Grammar School, only the Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning practice papers below are relevant.
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1
For those preparing for the Kirklees 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend:
11 Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Maths Long Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Maths Multiple Choice Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)
11 Plus English Cloze (Pack 1)
11 Plus English/Verbal Reasoning: Comprehension (Pack 1)
For those preparing for the Skipton High School 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend:
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
The information provided about Yorkshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are five grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. Since 2012, each of these schools has been part of The Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton. For 11+ details and admissions information about each individual school, please read the articles below:
Newport Girls’ High School
Wolverhampton High School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies from year to year
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June
Admissions Info: Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton
Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to all of the grammar schools in Wolverhampton and Wrekin is solely determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. Each of the schools in the region encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.
Year 7 admissions to Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools are coordinated through the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.
How to Register for the Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at a Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar school, parents must register their child with the Consortium. Parents need to complete two forms for 11+ entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form and the Local Authority (LA) form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the LA directly by the deadline date specified on the form.
Late candidates will only be considered following the initial allocation of places, so it is always advised to meet the registration deadline in the first instance.
Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools all use the same 11 Plus entrance assessment. The exam tests a child’s verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning, maths and English. The four subjects are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes.
Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.
Practice Papers for the Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
At Exam Papers Plus, we have a selection of practice exam papers that are highly recommended for those sitting the Wolverhampton and Wrekin 11 Plus:
- Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM English Cloze Test (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM English Comprehension (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus English Spelling CEM
- Eleven Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are five fully selective grammar schools in the Warwickshire region. For 11 Plus exam admissions information for each specific school, please visit the pages below:
Stratford Girls’ Grammar School
11 Plus Exam Information for Warwickshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies per school
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Warwickshire County Council, 01926 414143
Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Year 7 places in Warwickshire grammar schools are allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to attend their preferred schools’ open day(s), which usually take place in June, before applying for a place. At these events, parents can learn more about the admissions process and prospective pupils can take a tour of the school.
Year 7 admissions to Warwickshire grammar schools are coordinated by Warwickshire County Council and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.
How to Register for the Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Warwickshire County Council’s Admissions Service, known as Warwickshire Admissions, oversees 11 Plus entry to all grammar schools in the region. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as the Grammar Schools in the Birmingham Consortium. To apply for entry to a school in Year 7, parents must register their child for the entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF).
The deadline for registration is usually in July and the form needs to be handed in to the local authority. Please note that schools in the region will not consider late registrations in the first round of placements.
Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Warwickshire eleven plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 45 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple-choice questions and cover verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and mathematics.
The verbal reasoning exam includes an English component, containing a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy section, which tests ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions.
Practice Papers for the Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
If your child is preparing for the Warwickshire grammar school entrance exam, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help:
11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Comprehension (CEM)
11+ Cloze (CEM)
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
The information provided about Warwickshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are six grammar schools in the Wirral region, and one in Liverpool (The Blue Coat School).
The 11 plus in Wirral is administered by the Wirral County Council for:
Wirral Grammar School for Girls
Wirral Grammar School for Boys
and Upton Hall School administer their own tests. For more details about each individual school’s eleven plus exam and their admissions procedures, please visit the pages above.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: May (Wirral), September (Liverpool)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Wirral – CEM (University of Durham) | St. Anselm’s and The Blue Coat School – set by school | Upton Hall – GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Upton Hall – 236 (subject to change), others not revealed
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June
Admissions Info: Wirral County Council, 0151 606 2000 | Upton Hall School, 0151 677 7696 | Liverpool City Council, 0151 233 3006
Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Despite Wirral and Liverpool grammar schools using different admissions assessments, all Year 7 places at the schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to visit their preferred schools ahead of applying for a secondary school place in order to learn more about the admissions process. Each school also has detailed documentation about their admissions process available on their respective websites.
How to Register for the Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at one of the four Wirral grammar schools, where the exam administered by Wirral County Council, parents must register their child with the local authority (LA) before October. This can be done online.
Both St. Anselm’s College and Upton Hall School administer their own tests and so parents should register their child directly with their chosen school.
For The Blue Coat School in Liverpool, parents should register their child for the eleven plus exam via Liverpool City Council.
Parents are advised to consult their chosen school’s website directly to ensure they fully understand the 11+ registration process.
Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
For Wirral schools:
Pupils taking the 11 Plus test for Wirral grammar schools will be tested on verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and mathematics. There are two tests, each lasting approximately 50 minutes.
For St. Anselm’s College:
Pupils will sit three tests that cover verbal reasoning, maths and English and a mental maths paper. The maths and English papers are both set by the school.
For Upton Hall School:
Students must sit two multiple choice verbal reasoning test, with each test lasting approximately 50 minutes.
For The Blue Coat School:
Students will sit three tests:
- Maths – 45 minutes long
- English – 50 minutes long
- Non-Verbal Reasoning – 20 minutes long
Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam online in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March.
Practice Papers for the Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For those sitting the Wirral grammar school eleven plus exam, we recommend the following resources:
11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning
As the Upton Hall School entrance exam focuses on verbal reasoning, we would specifically recommend:
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
For the St Anselm’s College 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice papers:
11+ English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11+ English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)
For The Blue Coat’s School 11 Plus entrance exam, pupils will benefit from the following practice resources:
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about Wirral and Liverpool grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Founded in 1933, St Anselm’s College is a Roman Catholic all-boys’ grammar school based in Birkenhead, Merseyside. The school currently teaches over 900 pupils aged between 11 and 18 and has had academy status since 2011.
St. Anselm’s provides a broad and balanced curriculum and has built on its background as a technology college to prepare its pupils for modern life. Away from academia, the College values pupil participation in a range of sporting and extracurricular pursuits, enabling students to develop their talents.
For an insight into life at St. Anselm’s College, watch this short promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for St. Anselm’s College
Address: St Anselm’s College, Manor Hill, Birkenhead, Merseyside, CH43 1UQ
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: info@st-anselms.com, 0151 652 1408
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 907
Number of Places in Year 7: 140
Open Day Date: June, September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Set by School
St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Admissions
St. Anselm’s administers its own entrance test for its 140 Year 7 places and admission is based on student performance in this eleven plus exam.
Competition for Year 7 places at the school is high, with over eight applications for every Year 7 place. In cases where the school is oversubscribed, the following admissions criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Baptised Catholic boys, living in the relevant area (defined as Wirral, Cheshire West and Chester and any other areas within 5 miles of the College).
- Baptised Christian, non-Catholic boys, living in the relevant area.
- Non-Catholic boys whose parents wish them to have a Catholic education.
The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St. Anselm’s College
To apply for a place at St. Anselm’s College, parents must complete two documents. The first, St. Anselm’s College’s Registration Form, can be found on the school’s website when registration opens. This form must be completed and returned to the school, along with a copy of the student’s baptismal certificate, if applicable.
Secondly, parents must complete a Parental Preference Form from Wirral Local Authority. Parents will receive 11+ test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.
St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam for St. Anselm’s College consists of three tests that cover:
- Verbal Reasoning
- Maths – 45 minutes, standard format
- English – 45 minutes, including comprehension with open answer questions
How to Prepare for the St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Exam?
Eleven plus exam dates are set well in advance, which allows students plenty of time to prepare for the tests. The key to preparing well for the exam is to start revision early. Before students begin their revision, we recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.
Competition for Year 7 places at St. Anselm’s College is high, so we recommend that students use practice exam papers as part of their study routine. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the 11+ exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked on the day. They also help parents identify any weaker areas that may need improving.
For students taking the St. Anselm’s College eleven plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
The information provided about St. Anselm’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
There are two grammar schools in the London Borough of Redbridge, Essex. For more detailed information about each school’s 11 Plus exam and their admissions process, please visit the pages below:
Woodford County High School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Redbridge Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May
Admissions Info: London Borough of Redbridge, 0208 554 5000
Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Year 7 places at Redbridge grammar schools are allocated based on pupil performance in the eleven plus entrance exam. Both schools in the region have limited places and are consistently oversubscribed. Before applying for a Year 7 place, parents are advised to visit their chosen school at one of their open events in order to better understand the school’s structure and curriculum.
Year 7 admissions to Redbridge grammar schools are managed by the local authority (LA), the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR), and parents must register online with LBR ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.
How to Register for the Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at a Redbridge grammar school, parents must register their child for the 11 Plus before the closing date via the LBR’s website.
LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances, and there is no waiting list either.
Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Redbridge 11+ exam covers verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. The test is multiple choice and results are fully standardised and age weighted.
Practice Papers for the Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Practice exam papers will provide students with a good understanding of what type of test questions to expect from the Redbridge 11 Plus exam.
To maximise your child’s chances of gaining a place at their chosen Redbridge grammar school, we would highly recommend that students use the following resources:
- 11+ Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Maths Long Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Maths Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ Comprehension CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ Cloze CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ English Spelling
The information provided about Redbridge grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently four grammar schools in the region of Dorset, with two based in Bournemouth and two in Poole. For specific eleven plus and admissions information for each school, please click on the links below:
11 Plus Exam Information for Dorset Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: September
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Scores are standardised; pass mark is not released
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Bournemouth Borough Council, 01202 456222 or Borough of Poole, 01202 261936
Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Year 7 places at Dorset grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before applying for a place, parents and prospective pupils should attend their preferred school’s open event in July. At these events, parents will have the opportunity to meet members of staff and current pupils and acquire more information about the admissions process.
The four grammar schools in Dorset share the same admissions process, although parents must apply to their own Local Authority (LA) in the first instance.
How to Register for the Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Parents who wish to register their child to sit the Dorset 11+ entrance test must register with their preferred schools before the September deadline. Registration forms can be completed online via each school’s website. As all four grammar schools in Dorset share the same eleven plus test, children only need to sit one test and results will be shared with the other schools.
Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam for Dorset grammar schools consists of three multiple choice tests that cover mathematics, English and verbal reasoning. Each test paper includes questions typical to the Key Stage 2 national curriculum and lasts around 50 minutes.
Parents will be notified of the test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March.
Practice Papers for the Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For pupils currently preparing for the Dorset entrance exam, we highly recommend the following resources, all of which are suitable for those taking the 11+ exam set by GL Assessment:
11+ Mathematics Problem Solving
The information provided about Dorset grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are seven grammar schools in Devon, with three Local Authorities (LA) involved in admissions: Devon County Council, Plymouth and Torbay. Because there are several local authorities involved, 11 Plus admissions in Devon can seem quite confusing. We recommend reading these individual posts for specific schools to learn more about the eleven plus exams and general admissions process:
Colyton Grammar School (Devon LA)
Devonport High School for Boys (Plymouth LA)
Devonport High School for Girls (Plymouth LA)
Plymouth High School for Girls (Plymouth LA)
Churston Ferrers Grammar School (Torbay LA)
Torquay Boys’ Grammar School (Torbay LA)
Torquay Girls’ Grammar School (Torbay LA)
11 Plus Exam Information for Devon Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: August (Torbay LA), September (Devon LA and Plymouth LA)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Devon and Torbay use CEM (University of Durham), Plymouth, uses GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Not revealed
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Devon LA, 01752 307469 | Plymouth LA, 01752 668000 | Torbay LA, 01803 201201
Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Application for admission to any Devon grammar school is made through the Local Authority directly. All prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in September before the year of entry.
Before applying for a place, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend their preferred school’s open event, where they will receive more detailed information about the admissions process.
How to Register for the Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Registration forms for all grammar schools in Devon are available to download from each of the school’s own websites. You can register with the following LAs, depending on which schools you are applying for:
Devon County Council
Plymouth LA
Torbay Council
As parents could be applying to various schools across the county, they are advised to visit each school’s website and consult their admissions documents individually, as registration dates can vary from school to school.
Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
As you might expect, 11+ tests at the region’s grammar schools vary. All seven schools set both English and mathematics papers, with schools in Devon and Torbay opting to assess verbal reasoning and non-verbal reasoning too. Devon and Torbay schools also include a short writing assessment.
Children should expect to answer a range of question types, including multiple-choice, short answer questions and even extended creative writing. Please refer to the individual school posts above for more detail on specific 11 Plus exam formats in the Devon grammar schools.
Practice Papers for the Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For pupils currently preparing for the Devon 11 Plus exam, we’d recommend the following resources:
For Devon and Torbay Grammar Schools:
11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
For Plymouth Grammar Schools:
The information provided about grammar schools in Devon was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently two grammar schools located in the London Borough of Bromley. For more information about the 11 Plus entrance exam at either of these schools, or for details on the admissions process, please consult the articles below:
11 Plus Exam Information for Bromley Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June (Newstead Wood), July (St. Olave’s)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Newstead Wood – GL Assessment | St Olave’s – Selective Eligibility Test (SET), set by the school
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Places allocated according to highest score (figures not revealed)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: The London Borough of Bromley, 0208 313 4044
Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to both Bromley grammar schools is by academic selection, via an entrance exam. Due to oversubscription at the schools, parents and students are actively encouraged to attend an open event at their chosen school to ensure that it is the right learning environment.
Both schools participate in the coordinated admissions process operated by the London Borough of Bromley and so parents must register their child online ahead of the eleven plus exam dates in September.
How to Register for the Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Although Newstead Wood and St Olave’s Grammar School use different entrance exams to determine Year 7 admission, both follow the London Borough of Bromley’s registration process. Parents must complete the Local Authority’s (LA) online application form, marking their preferred school.
Next, parents should download their preferred school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which registers their child to sit the entrance exam. The SIF is available via the schools’ websites and must be submitted directly to the school before the public deadline.
Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The grammar schools in Bromley use different 11 Plus exams. We’ve outlined their formats in more detail below:
Newstead Wood School
Prospective pupils will sit two tests that cover Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. Both these tests are multiple-choice and take between 40-50 minutes each. The scores achieved by girls in these tests will be age adjusted and placed in ranked order based on the total score achieved.
St Olave’s Grammar School
St. Olave’s operate a two-stage process for their 11 Plus:
Stage 1
Boys must sit the Selective Eligibility Test (SET); this is a multiple-choice test that covers English comprehension, mathematics, verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions.
Stage 2
Boys who pass the SET will be invited to sit the school’s second stage tests in English and mathematics.
For both schools, parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.
Practice Papers for the Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For girls due to sit the Newstead Wood School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
For boys preparing for the St. Olave’s Grammar School entrance test, we would recommend the resources below, which are relevant for both stages of the exam:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1
The information provided about the Bromley grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently six grammar schools in Berkshire, with four based in Slough. Read our guide to the Slough Grammar School Consortium for more details on the 11 Plus exam in that region.
The two remaining schools are based in Berkshire itself. For 11+ exam details and admissions information for each of these schools, please click on the links below:
11 Plus Exam Information for Berkshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 108 – 114 (this varies and is subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: admin@kendrick.reading.sch.uk, 0118 901 5859 | secretary@reading-school-co.uk, 0118 901 5600
Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to both grammar schools in Berkshire is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering either of these schools as an option, you are advised to attend an open day, which usually take place in the summer term. At these events, parents can take a tour of the school, ask questions to school staff members and have the opportunity to learn more about the school’s curriculum.
How to Register for the Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
The Berkshire grammar schools use the same 11+ entrance exam as the Slough Consortium schools. If applying to more than one school, students must be registered with each school by June, in accordance with each school’s admissions policy.
Scores from the 11+ exam can only be shared with the schools for which a child is registered, so parents must ensure registration is complete for all preferred schools before the deadline. Registration forms can be found on the schools’ websites.
Parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) by October, which can be downloaded from the Local Authority website.
Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Berkshire 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 50 minutes each. Both grammar schools in Berkshire use the same test papers, which assess a child’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills. Throughout these tests, children will be required to show competence in KS2 English and maths.
Parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October. Results will be available online and the final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.
Practice Papers for the Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For children preparing for the Berkshire 11+ exam, we’d highly recommend the following resources to maximise their chances of success:
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Multiple-Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about the Berkshire Grammar Schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are four grammar schools in the London Borough of Bexley. For more information on the 11 Plus exam at each of these schools and for guidance on their admissions process, please click on the links below:
Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School
11 Plus Exam Information for Bexley Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 216 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May
Admissions Info: London Borough of Bexley, 0208 303 7777
Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All four grammar schools adhere to the Bexley Coordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme. Only children who pass the Bexley entrance test can be considered for admission in Year 7. However, parents should be aware that achieving the necessary pass mark in the 11+ exam isn’t a guarantee of a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school.
Parents and prospective students are invited to attend an open event at their preferred school, which usually takes place in October. These events give parents and students the opportunity to tour the school, meet members of staff and talk to current pupils.
To be considered for a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school, parents must register their child for the eleven plus exam, which takes place in September.
How to Register for the Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school, parents must complete an online application form via their Local Authority (LA). Parents are advised to contact the LA directly with any specific admission questions, rather than contacting the schools themselves. Contact details for the LA can be found above.
Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Bexley grammar school eleven plus exam consists of two test papers, each lasting around 50 minutes. The two tests cover the following subjects:
- Verbal reasoning (including some literacy)
- Numerical reasoning (maths)
- Non-verbal reasoning
The papers are divided into timed sections and most questions are multiple-choice. Children will have a short break between the two test papers.
Practice Papers for the Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
The resources below will prove useful for children currently preparing for the Bexley grammar school eleven plus exam:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)
11 Plus Cloze (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling (CEM)
11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
The information provided about the Bexley Grammar Schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are 15 grammar schools in the Lincolnshire Grammar School Consortium at present. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:
Kesteven and Grantham Girls’ School
Kesteven and Sleaford High School Selective Academy
Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford
Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle
11 Plus Exam Information for Lincolnshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: March
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 220 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Lincolnshire County Council, 01522 552 222
Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to all of the grammar schools in Lincolnshire are subject to pupil performance in the 11+ exam. When a child is in year 5 or 6, parents will have the opportunity to attend their preferred schools’ open events, which include a tour of the school and talks by senior members of staff.
Each of the Lincolnshire grammar schools fully comply with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangement for Year 7 and are part of the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.
How to Register for the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at one of the grammar schools in Lincolnshire, parents should visit their Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest before the March closing date. To book a place for the 11 Plus exam, parents should also complete a registration form on one of the grammar schools’ websites.
Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The eleven plus test for the Lincolnshire grammar schools consists of two multiple-choice papers that test children’s Verbal (about 50 minutes) and Non-Verbal (about 40 minutes) Reasoning skills. The Non-Verbal test also assesses Spatial Reasoning.
Following the exam, parents should receive the results from the LA in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the CAF. In March of the following year, the LA will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.
Practice Papers for the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Lincolnshire grammar schools 11+ exams. We would highly recommend the following packs:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about the Lincolnshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Since 2016, there have been four schools within the Trafford Grammar Schools Consortium. Read the linked articles below for 11+ information and admissions details about each school specifically:
Altrincham Grammar School for Girls
The following schools are not part of the Trafford Consortium but still use the 11 Plus exam. You can find more details on these schools using the links below:
11 Plus Exam Information for Trafford Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 334 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: school.admissions@trafford.gov.uk, 0161 912 5007
Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to any of the four grammar schools in Trafford is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each of the schools hosts an open event annually in June. At the event, students and parents have the opportunity to tour the school and learn more about their approaches to learning.
While all four schools are part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium, they are each responsible for their own admissions into Year 7. Each of the schools within the Consortium use the same 11+ test.
How to Register for the Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a place at one of Trafford’s grammar schools, parents must register their child for the 11 Plus entrance examination. Online forms are available on each school’s admissions page when registration is open.
In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Parents should list the schools in ranked order of preference.
Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Trafford 11+ exam consists of two test papers that cover Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning. Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions.
Once the test has been taken, parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March.
Practice Papers for the Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For students currently studying for the Trafford 11+ exam, we would highly recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11 plus test:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)
11 Plus Cloze (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)
11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
The information provided about the Trafford Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently 13 grammar schools in Buckinghamshire. For eleven plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:
Dr. Challoner’s Grammar School
Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School
11 Plus Exam Information for Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June (for those outside of the county)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 121 qualifying score (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Buckinghamshire County Council, 01296 395000
Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
From 2018, admission to Buckinghamshire grammar schools in Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which aims to select students based on academic ability. Admission into Year 7 at all schools is managed by Buckinghamshire County Council.
Each of the Buckinghamshire grammar schools host a range of open events, often in the summer term, which give prospective pupils and parents the opportunity to take a tour of the school campus, meet senior staff and current pupils.
How to Register for the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Pupils who currently attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to take the county’s 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. However, parents must complete and return a Supplementary Information Form. These are available to download via any of the schools’ websites.
Students who live outside of Buckinghamshire but wish to attend a school in the county from Year 7 must register using the Bucks online application portal.
Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
From 2019, the exam board for the 11+ test in Buckinghamshire is GL Assessment. The Buckinghamshire Secondary Transfer Test is split into two papers that test:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and mathematics
Each test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes and all questions are multiple-choice. The 11+ Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Mathematics section – 25%
Parents will receive online results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, with final Year 7 places published in March.
Practice Papers for the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Bucks 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice relevant for the Bucks 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about the Buckinghamshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently two grammar schools in Barnet and one in Enfield. For specific 11 Plus and admissions information about each school, please click on the links below:
Henrietta Barnett School (Barnet)
Queen Elizabeth’s School (Barnet)
The Latymer School (Enfield)
11 Plus Exam Information for Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Henrietta Barnett School – CEM (University of Durham) | Queen Elizabeth’s School and The Latymer School – GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Barnet – not revealed | Enfield – 210 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Barnet Local Authority, 0208 359 7651 | Enfield Council, 0208 379 1000
Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Hertfordshire grammar schools in Barnet and Enfield use different assessment providers but nevertheless, all Year 7 places are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exams.
Each grammar school in the area is significantly oversubscribed and so parents are encouraged to attend their preferred schools’ open events ahead of applying for a place.
Parents must apply to their local authority (LA) ahead of the eleven plus exam date. For students in Barnet, parents can apply directly to Barnet Local Authority, while those in Enfield should apply to Enfield Council only.
How to Register for the Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a place in Year 7 at either a Barnet or Enfield grammar school, parents must register their child with their LA. Both LAs require parents to complete both a Common Application Form (CAF) and an entrance test entry form for their preferred school. Both forms can be completed online and must be sent on time, as late applications are not accepted.
Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
As stated above, Barnet and Enfield grammar schools use different eleven plus exams. Below we have outlined the test format used by each school:
Henrietta Barnett School
This test consists of two rounds, with the first-round testing verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. The test lasts for approximately 70 minutes. The top 300 students from round one will be invited back to sit the second exam.
This second test consists of English (comprehension and creative writing) and problem-solving maths questions.
Queen Elizabeth’s School
The eleven plus entrance exam at Queen Elizabeth’s Barnet consists of two multiple choice test papers, covering English and mathematics. Both papers are taken by candidates in the same session.
The Latymer School
This 11+ test consists of two parts; part one is multiple choice mathematics and verbal reasoning test that last 50 minutes. The top 650 ranked candidates from part one will be invited to sit part two, a written English test. Overall, this test lasts one hour and is split into two sections that test reading comprehension and creative writing.
Practice Papers for the Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For the Henrietta Barnet 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:
Round 1
11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Maths: Multiple Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1
Round 2
11 Plus English (Open Answer) Pack 1
11 Plus English (Open Answer) Pack 2
11 Plus Maths (Open Answer) Pack 1
11 Plus Maths (Open Answer) Pack 2
For the Queen Elizabeth School for Boys 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Spelling (GL)
For The Latymer School 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:
Round 1
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
Round 2
11 Plus English (Open Answer) Pack 1
11 Plus English (Open Answer) Pack 2
The information provided about Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are six grammar schools in the Medway region. For eleven plus information and specific details about each school’s admissions process, we suggest reading the articles below:
Chatham Grammar School for Girls
Holcombe Grammar School for Boys
Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School
11 Plus Exam Information for Medway Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies each year
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Medway Council, 01634 331110
Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 places for Medway grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. Prior to applying for a place, parents are advised to attend their preferred schools’ open event to get more information about the admissions process.
Schools within the Medway local authority use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm the criteria of their preferred school(s) directly before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).
How to Register for the Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at any of the Medway grammar schools, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process.
Alternatively, parents can call the admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any Year 7 application questions. Parents are advised to contact their local authority, rather than individual schools, with 11+ registration questions.
Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The eleven plus exam for Medway grammar schools test verbal reasoning, maths and English. Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last around 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.
In previous years, the maths and English sections have been double-weighted, compared with verbal reasoning. This means that the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score.
Practice Papers for the Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
At Exam Papers Plus, we would advise that students use 11+ practice papers under timed conditions so that they are used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.
For students currently preparing for the Medway grammar schools eleven plus exam, we would highly recommend the following resources:
11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Maths: Multiple Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1
11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1
The information provided about Medway grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
The selective schools in Surrey are divided between two areas of the county: Kingston-upon-Thames and Sutton. Please refer to the specific articles below for information about each school’s 11 Plus admissions information.
The grammar schools in Kingston-upon-Thames are:
The Sutton grammar schools are:
Sutton Grammar School for Boys
Wallington County Grammar School
Wallington High School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Surrey Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: August (Sutton), September (Kingston)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September and October (Sutton), October and November (Kingston)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: No set pass mark for Sutton schools, Kingston schools average 200 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: May and June
Admissions Info: For Sutton schools: Sutton Council, 0208 7705000 | For Kingston schools: Kingston Upon Thames, 0208 5474610
Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Sutton grammar schools use the Selective Eligibility Test (SET) to determine Year 7 place allocation. For some of the Sutton schools, the SET is the first stage in a two-step assessment process. The Kingston-upon-Thames grammar schools also use a two-stage entrance exam process to allocate places. As Surrey is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the country, parents are always encouraged to visit their preferred school(s) ahead of applying for a Year 7 place.
All of Surrey’s Year 7 places are allocated via local authorities, whether that’s Sutton Council or Kingston Upon Thames. Parents should confirm their local authority (LA) and check more detailed admission criteria via their LA’s website.
How to Register for the Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For Sutton grammar schools, parents can visit Sutton Council’s website, which provides direct links to the schools in the area, their admissions policies and how to register to take the SET.
For Kingston Schools, parents must complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is available on each of the school’s websites. Parents can also visit Kingston Upon Thames’s LA website for more details.
Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The SET, used by all Sutton schools, consists of two multiple-choice tests that last 40-45 minutes each and focus on mathematics and English. Students who achieve the required standard at stage one will be asked, at some schools, to sit an extended English writing task for stage two.
Both the Kingston-Upon-Thames schools have a two-stage process that test students’ English skills and mathematical knowledge. The first round at both schools is multiple-choice. The second round is open-anser can involve written tasks such as story writing and mathematical problem solving.
Parents will receive the results of their child’s entrance exam online in October, and final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.
Practice Papers for the Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For pupils currently preparing for the SET at Sutton schools, we would recommend the following practice resources:
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
And for further subject-specific practice:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
For those studying for either of the Kingston-Upon-Thames grammar school entrance exams, we recommend the following:
Stage 1
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)
11 Plus Comprehension (Pack 1)
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving
11 Plus Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
Stage 2
11 Plus English 1 (Open answer)
11 Plus English 2 (Open answer)
The information provided about Surrey grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are four grammar schools in the Lancashire region and one in Cumbria. For 11 Plus details and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:
Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School
Clitheroe Royal Grammar School
Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School
Lancaster Royal Grammar School
Queen Elizabeth Grammar School, Penrith (Cumbria)
11 Plus Exam Information for Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: Lancashire – September, Cumbria – June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment (Lancashire)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies year to year
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Lancashire County Council, 0300 123 6707 | Cumbria County Council, 01228 221582
Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 places to Lancashire and Cumbria grammar schools are allocated based on student performance in the eleven plus entrance examination, which takes place in September.
Each of the schools organises an open event during the academic year to give students and parents the opportunity to meet staff members and find out more about the admissions process before applying for a place.
The Lancashire grammar schools comply with the admission criteria as set out by the Lancashire Coordinated Scheme for secondary schools. Those applying for a place at Queen Elizabeth Grammar School in Cumbria should refer to Cumbria County Council.
How to Register for the Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Both Lancashire and Cumbrian grammar schools require parents to complete two application forms, one from their preferred school, and one from their Local Authority (LA). Both of these forms can be completed online and must be done before the exam entrance date.
Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam for Lancashire grammar schools consists of three multiple-choice papers covering English, mathematics and verbal reasoning.
The eleven plus exam for Cumbria’s grammar school is split into three papers that test mathematics, verbal reasoning and non-verbal reasoning.
All three tests are taken on the same day and each paper includes questions typical to the KS2 National Curriculum.
Practice Papers for the Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For Lancashire grammar schools 11+ preparation, we highly recommend the following 11 plus resources:
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)
For Queen Elizabeth Grammar School in Cumbria, we highly recommend the following 11+ practice resources:
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Lancashire and Cumbria grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Kent is currently the largest grammar school area in the UK. Due to the number of schools involved, we recommend you visit the pages below for specific 11+ details and admissions information. You may also wish to read this article that explains the format of the test in more detail.
Chatham & Clarendon Grammar School
Dartford Grammar School for Girls
Dover Grammar School for Girls
Maidstone Grammar School for Girls
Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School
Simon Langton Grammar School for Boys
The Folkestone School for Girls
Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School
Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys
Wilmington Grammar School for Boys
Wilmington Grammar School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Kent Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies – 320 for total score (subject to change year-by-year)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April and May
Admissions Info: Kent County Council, 03000 412121
Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at any Kent grammar school, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard. Before applying for a place, parents and children can attend the schools’ open events, where they can tour the school and ask questions about the admissions process.
Year 7 admissions to Kent grammar schools are coordinated through Kent County Council and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11 Plus exam date in September.
How to Register for the Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
In the first instance, parents must register their child to sit the Kent Test, which can be done online via Kent County Council. Once students have taken the test in September, parents will receive their results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the Kent local authority website.
Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Kent Test consists of two multiple choice tests:
- An hour-long exam divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
- An hour-long test that focuses on reasoning. This is divided into three sections:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Spatial reasoning
Pupils are also required to complete a 40-minute writing task. This does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but exists in case of borderline or appeal cases.
Practice Papers for the Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
The Kent Test covers a range of subject areas, so practice exam papers are an excellent way to improve your child’s overall 11+ performance.
Students sitting the Kent Test with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent grammar school will benefit from these practice tests that are specifically designed to be as accurate as possible:
Additionally, if students require further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, consider the following practice papers:
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)
- 11 Plus Spelling (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
The information provided about Kent grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are seven grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For eleven plus details and admissions information for each school, please visit the pages below:
High School for Girls, Gloucester
11 Plus Exam Information for Gloucestershire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: No specific pass mark revealed
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May, June
Admissions Info: Gloucestershire County Council, 01452 425000
Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Year 7 places across the grammar schools in Gloucestershire are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Each school hosts various open events throughout the academic year, which are open to both parents and prospective pupils. More information about the admissions process is provided at these events and students will have the opportunity to take a tour around the school campus as well as meet with staff and current pupils.
All admissions to Gloucestershire grammar schools in Year 7 are coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council. For children to be considered for a grammar school place, parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11 Plus exam date in September.
How to Register for the Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at a Gloucestershire grammar school, parents must register their child with the Local Authority, Gloucestershire County Council. Next, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before October, which can be done online via the Council’s website.
Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
All grammar schools in the region use the same 11+ exam from CEM (University of Durham). The test consists of two multiple choice papers containing questions related to verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning.
Each exam takes around an hour to complete, which includes reading the instructions and completing some worked examples at the beginning. The tests themselves are around 45 to 50 minutes. Both tests are taken on the same day and there is a 20-minute break between the papers.
Results will be available for parents in October, with notification of final Year 7 place allocations published in March.
Practice Papers for the Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Practice exam papers are an effective tool to help prepare successfully for the Gloucestershire 11 Plus. We would highly recommend the resources below for students taking the exam in the near future:
- 11 Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- 11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
- 11 Plus CEM Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus CEM Comprehension (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus CEM Cloze (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus: Spelling
The information provided about the Gloucestershire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Founded in 1888, Wallington High School for Girls (WHSG) is an all-girls selective grammar school for students aged 11-18. The school is located in the London Borough of Sutton. In 2015, the school became part of the Nonsuch and Wallington Education Trust.
In recent years, school numbers have significantly increased, resulting in an expansion of new teaching and extracurricular facilities on campus. WHSG has specialist status in engineering and languages. Outside of the classroom, students are encouraged to participate in a number of extracurricular activities including sport, music, drama and arts. The school also has its own Combined Cadet Force.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wallington High School for Girls
Address: Wallington High School for Girls, Woodcote Road, Wallington SM6 0PH
County: London – Borough of Sutton
Admissions Info: info@wallingtongirls.org.uk, 020 8647 2380
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,303 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 210
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Part One: multiple-choice maths and English (SET). Part Two: open answer maths and English
Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
Wallington High School for Girls is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme, meaning admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. There is huge competition for the 210 Year 7 places, so prospective students and their parents are actively encouraged to attend an open event before applying for a place.
At the open events, parents and students can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff and current pupils.
It is likely that WHSG will be oversubscribed for places. In such cases, the school applies the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after and previously looked after children
- Students in receipt of the Pupil Premium
- Students in highest rank order according to their predicted Average Point Score
Take a look at the full breakdown of WHSG’s admission policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus (11+) Entry to Wallington High School for Girls
Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration opens. To apply for a place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London, or Surrey, can complete the CAF online.
If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit WHSG’s second stage exam. Should they pass this test, parents must include the school on the CAF for pupils to be eligible for consideration of a Year 7 place.
Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Wallington High School for Girls’ 11+ assessment is split into two stages:
Stage 1 – Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each lasting approximately 45 minutes.
This Selective Eligibility Test is run in conjunction with other local schools in the Borough of Sutton. The result of the SET determines whether or not a student is eligible for the second stage test.
Stage 2 – English and Mathematics, the English test is an extended writing task to test comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.
At WHSG, the final rank order is determined by the aggregate scores of the SET and the two parts of the second test in the ratio of 1:1:1. This means it is equally weighted across subjects.
How to Prepare for the Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
Sutton is a fiercely competitive grammar school area. In order for students to maximise their chances of gaining a place at Wallington High School for Girls, it is important that they are fully prepared heading into the exam room.
Parents should help their daughter create a revision plan months ahead of the test date, to ensure all subjects are thoroughly covered. Online practice papers can help parents to identify weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
We have specifically designed practice papers to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:
Round 1 (S.E.T)
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
For more subject-specific practice, we recommend the following:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
Round 2
For Round 2, we would recommend the following packs:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
The information provided about Wallington High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
There are currently five grammar schools in the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar School Consortium. For specific details on each school’s 11 Plus process and for further information about admissions, please visit the pages below:
Wolverhampton High School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies from year-to-year
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April onwards
Admissions Info: Walsall Council, 01922 652585
Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton grammar schools is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each of the five schools encourage prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.
The schools operate their admissions arrangements and procedures in line with their Local Authority’s coordinated scheme for school admissions, although Queen Mary’s Grammar does administer its own 11+ test. Parents must register their child online ahead of the eleven plus exam date in September.
How to Register for the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To register for a Year 7 place at a Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton grammar school, parents must register their child with the Consortium before July. The schools within the Consortium require parents to complete both an Entrance Test Registration Form and a Local Authority (LA) form, which can be completed online via the local council website.
Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton 11+ exam tests children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning, Mathematics and English comprehension. These four subjects are split over two tests, which each last 45 minutes.
Online results will be available to parents through their LA in October and Year 7 places will be formally allocated in March.
Practice Papers for the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To give children the best chance of success in the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton 11+ exam, we specifically recommend the following resources:
11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
11+ English Cloze Test CEM (Pack 1)
11+ English Comprehension CEM (Pack 1)
11+ Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning CEM
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning CEM
11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning CEM
The information provided about the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently eight partially-selective grammar schools that make up the Hertfordshire, South West Herts Consortium:
Watford Grammar School for Boys
Watford Grammar School for Girls
11 Plus Exam Information for South West Hertfordshire Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: No fixed pass mark to date
Allocations Date: March
Admissions Info: South West Herts Consortium
South West Herts Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
To be eligible for a Year 7 place at any of the grammar schools within the South West Herts Consortium, students must sit the eleven plus test. During September and October, the schools host specific open events for prospective Year 7 pupils and their parents. Not only do these events give parents the chance to learn more about the schools and their ethos, but they also provide the opportunity to ask questions about the admissions process.
How to Register for the South West Hertforshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Parents should register their child for the 11+ test via the Consortium’s website. The majority of the grammar schools in the area also require parents to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which can usually be found on each school’s website.
South West Herts Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The South West Herts 11 Plus exam consists of two tests:
- A Maths paper set by GL Assessment – this lasts for approximately 50 minutes
- A Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM – this lasts for approximately one hour
Prospective pupils to Bushey Meads School also have the opportunity to take the Technological Aptitude Test, which is based on non-verbal reasoning questions. This optional exam has two test papers, both of which are multiple choice.
Practice Papers for the South West Hertforshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Those studying for the South West Herts eleven plus exam would benefit from using the following resources:
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
The information provided about the South West Hertfordshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently four grammar schools in the Slough Grammar School Consortium. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:
- Langley Grammar School
- Herschel Grammar School
- St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School
- Upton Court Grammar School
11 Plus Exam Information for Slough Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: October
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: 111 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: April, May and June
Admissions Info: Slough Borough Council, 01753 875728
Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
All Year 7 places in Slough grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each individual school typically hosts its own open event that provides detailed information on its admissions process. These events normally provide parents and prospective students with the opportunity to take a tour of the school, meet staff members and talk to current pupils at the school.
Year 7 admissions to Slough grammar schools are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.
How to Register for the Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To apply for a Year 7 place at a Slough grammar school, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium before October. The next step is for parents to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before June, which can be done online via the Slough County Council website.
Parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.
Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Slough 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 60-65 minutes each. All four schools within the Slough Consortium use the same test papers, which test children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills.
Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam online in October, and final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.
Practice Papers for the Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
To maximise your child’s chances of passing the Slough 11 Plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources:
11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11+ Multiple-Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about the Slough Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
There are currently eight grammar schools in the Birmingham Grammar School Consortium. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:
King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys
King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls
King Edward VI Five Ways School
King Edward VI Handsworth School
Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls
Handsworth Grammar School for Boys
11 Plus Exam Information for Birmingham Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: June
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Results Date: October
Pass Mark: Varies, according to school – previously 204-215 (subject to change)
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: May and June
Admissions Info: Birmingham City Council, 0121 303 1888
Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions
Prospective pupils aiming to gain a Year 7 place at a Birmingham grammar school must sit the 11 Plus exam. Each of the eight schools mentioned above host specific open events for prospective pupils and parents to visit the schools, learn more about their curriculum and ask any questions about admission to Year 7.
With admissions coordinated by the Birmingham Grammar Schools Consortium, parents must register their child for the eleven plus exam before the deadline.
How to Register for the Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
Parents must register their child for a Year 7 place at a Birmingham grammar school via the Birmingham Consortium before June. Following this, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before October; this step can be completed online via the Birmingham City Council website. Parents can select more than one preferred school on this form.
Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
The Birmingham 11+ exam consists of two papers that each last approximately 50 minutes. All eight schools within the Birmingham Consortium use the same test papers, which assess a child’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning, Numerical Reasoning and Reading skills.
Results from the 11 Plus will be available to parents online in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March the following year.
Practice Papers for the Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam
For students currently preparing for the Birmingham 11 Plus exam, we would recommend the following practice resources:
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
Eleven Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
Eleven Plus CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning
Eleven Plus English: Comprehension (CEM) (Pack 1)
Eleven Plus English: Cloze (CEM) (Pack 1)
The information provided about the Birmingham Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Please note: The information in this post reflects the changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.
Founded in 1901, Wycombe High School is an all-girls’ grammar school located in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire. It was the first state grammar school for girls in the area and now has more than 1,300 girls on the school roll. It became an academy in 2011 and admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Secondary Transfer Test.
The school offers its students a range of facilities, including a music centre and large library. Pupils are split across six houses, named after influential females: Austen, Brontë, Curie, Parks, Pankhurst and Nightingale.
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Wycombe High School
Address: Wycombe High School, Marlow Road, High Wycombe HP11 1TB
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: office@whs.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 523961
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,296 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: July, September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Wycombe High School Year 7 Admissions
Wycombe High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, Year 7 entry is determined by pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The test is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its coordinated admissions scheme.
All applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Full details of Wycombe High School’s admissions process can be found on Buckinghamshire County Council’s website, and via the school website. The school’s admissions team can answer any further enquiries about the Secondary Transfer Test by email at admissions@whs.bucks.sch.uk, or by phone, on 01494 523961.
Parents are encouraged to visit Wycombe High School before applying for a Year 7 place. The school hosts open events, which usually take place in July and September. At these events, parents and prospective pupils will be able to talk to school staff members and current pupils. Find out more about Wycombe High School’s open events, here.
In cases where there are more applicants than available Year 7 places at Wycombe High School, the following oversubscription criteria is applied, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after girls
- Girls living in the catchment area of the school
- Girls who have a sister that attends the school
- Girls who have a sister attending another secondary school in the Wycombe High School Academies Trust
- Girls eligible for Free School Meals
- Daughter/s of a member of Wycombe High School staff
- Girls that live closest to the school
From 2018, a waiting list will be maintained from 1 January to 31 August by Wycombe High School itself for Year 7 admissions.
How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Wycombe High School via the 11+ Exam
Girls who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school will be automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. Parents of students who live outside of the school’s catchment area can find details of how to register on the Buckinghamshire County Council website before registration opens.
Parents will receive eleven plus exam test results before the end of October and must submit secondary school applications at this point. For students who live outside of the catchment area, more information on how to apply via local authorities can be found on the registration portal.
Parents who require information about the application process for Wycombe High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council directly, using this Admissions Team Contact Form.
Wycombe High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test at 11+ consists of two test papers:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning questions
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions
Both tests are multiple choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. Each correct answer is worth one raw mark and both tests last for approximately 45 minutes. The verbal skills section is weighted at 50%, with the non-verbal and maths sections each weighted at 25%.
The 11 plus exam at Wycombe High School is taken by students in September of Year 6. All children take the test on the same day whether they are within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. Both tests are fully age standardised to ensure that no students have an advantage based on their age.
The Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark but does have a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students must meet this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place. Please note that achieving the Secondary Transfer Test Score (STTS), does not guarantee a place at the school. Each grammar school in Buckinghamshire sets its own additional admissions criteria.
Students will have the opportunity to take a practice 11 plus test two days before the Secondary Transfer Test. This aims to give students the experience of exam conditions and to help familiarise them with the layout of the eleven plus test.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Wycombe High School 11 Plus Exam?
The first step towards preparing for the Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test is to be organised. In the first instance, parents should aim to create an in-depth study timetable with their child that covers all the required subjects. We would recommend starting 11 Plus exam revision a few months ahead of the actual exam.
Our practice tests help children to prepare for grammar school admission exams, including the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Wycombe High School. Not only do these practice papers allow students to become more familiar with the types of questions they could be asked, but they also allow parents to see where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie.
For the 11 plus Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test, we recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Wycombe High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Wycombe High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Wycombe High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established in 1423, Royal Latin School (RLS) is a co-educational grammar that educates students aged between 11 and 18. Located in Buckingham, the school has an interesting history, being almost 600 years old and the only pre-Reformation grammar school in the county.
Royal Latin School is a DfES Specialist School in Science and a training school. In 2011, the school became an academy. In previous years, RLS has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. The school operates a house system where students compete in various activities throughout the academic year. The six houses are Barton, Denton, Newton, Ruding, Stratton, and Verney.
For an insight into academic life at Royal Latin School, take a look at this welcome video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Royal Latin School
Address: Royal Latin School, Chandos Road, Buckingham, MK18 1AX
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: office@royallatin.org, 01280 813065
School Type: Co-educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,277 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 174 (approx.)
Open Day Date: June/July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
Royal Latin School 11 plus Year 7 Admissions
Royal Latin School is a selective grammar and an academy, so Year 7 admission is based on students meeting the academic criteria.
From 2018, admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
For more information about the full admissions process at Royal Latin Grammar School, parents can visit the admissions pages on the school’s website here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
RLS has an Open Evening in June, where parents and prospective students are invited to take a tour of the school and meet staff members. The school also welcomes visits during school hours in the autumn and spring terms. To find out more about the Open Evening or to arrange a private visit, parents should contact the school office on 01280 813065.
The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after and previously looked after children
- Children living in the catchment area of the school
- Students who have a brother or sister at the school
- Children with exceptional medical or social needs
- Students who qualify for Free School Meals
- Students that live closest to the school
Royal Latin Grammar also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.
Royal Latin School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.
How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Royal Latin School
Children who attend a Buckinghamshire Local Authority primary school are automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Students who attend a partner school, or live outside the catchment area, need to be registered for testing using the Bucks online application portal.
As with all 11+ Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.
11 plus Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test Format
Royal Latin School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
Each test is multiple-choice and lasts approximately 45 minutes. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised and students need to meet the minimum qualifying score of 121 or above to be considered for a Year 7 place.
Students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test?
Preparing for the 11+ Secondary School Transfer Test requires students to be organised. The sooner they start studying for the test, the more time they’ll have to cover each topic. We believe that the best way for students to get organised for an exam is to create a study schedule that outlines what needs to be studied and when. Parents should help their child create a plan that’s manageable and flexible enough to be adjusted when extra practice is needed in certain areas.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice exam papers that help students prepare for entrance exams like the Royal Latin 11 plus exam. Our test papers are a great resource for identifying a student’s strengths and weaknesses. By introducing our practice papers into a student’s preparation early, parents can allocate more time in their child’s schedule to focus on their weaker areas.
As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed conditions so that they get used to answering questions quickly whilst under pressure.
For the Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Royal Latin School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Royal Latin School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Royal Latin School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established in 1624, Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School, often referred to as ‘Borlase’, is a co-educational, selective state grammar school. Educating students aged between 11 and 18, the school is located in Marlow, Buckinghamshire. The school became co-educational in 1987, having previously been a boys’ grammar. Borlase is a specialist Performing Arts College and has academy status.
The school holds a number of awards, including the Sportsmark Award, the NACE Challenge Award, the Healthy Schools Mark and the Continuing Professional Development Mark. It is also designated as a National Support School. In previous years, Borlase has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted.
For an insight into academic life at Sir Henry Floyd, take a look at this welcome video:
11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School
Address: Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School, West Street, Marlow, SL7 2BR
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: enquiries@swbgs.com, 01628 816500
School Type: Co-educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 986 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 120 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus exam, Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
Year 7 admission to Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council.
More information about the admissions process at Sir William Borlase’s Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
The school holds an Open Evening in September for parents and prospective students, where there are exhibitions and demonstrations in various departments. The Open Evening also includes a guided tour by pupils at the school and a presentation by the Head and Deputy Head. To book a place at the Open Evening, parents should contact the school reception on 01628 816500.
The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after or previously looked after children
- Pupils who are eligible for free school meals
- Students that live within the catchment area of the school
- Students who have a brother or sister who already attends the school
- Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
- Students who live closest to the school
Sir William Borlase also has a waiting list system in place, where students are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.
Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.
How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School
Students who already attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test. Those who attend a partner school, or live outside of Borlase’s catchment area, need to be registered for testing and sit the test at a central venue in Buckinghamshire.
The Registration Form can be accessed on the Grammar Schools and Transfer Test page on the Bucks County Council website.
Parents who have any questions about the admissions procedure at Sir William Borlase are encouraged to contact the Admissions team at County Hall, Aylesbury, Bucks on 01296 395 000. Alternatively, parents can email using the Contact Us form on their website.
Results from the 11+ exam are sent to parents before the end of October.
Sir William Borlase’s Grammar 11 pus School Secondary Transfer Test Format
Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School uses the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised to ensure that no student has an advantage based on their age. In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Borlase, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.
As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise themselves with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?
Students who are prepared for the Secondary Transfer Test are likely to feel more confident on the day of the test. At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a ‘little but often’ approach to exam revision is the best way to improve a child’s performance.
We advise that parents should create a revision timetable with their child to ensure that they cover each topic. The timetable should outline what subjects need to be studied on what days and allow for flexibility as the test approaches.
Exam Papers Plus publishes exam practice tests to help students prepare for entrance exams like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Sir William Borlase. Our practice tests are designed to improve students’ confidence by familiarising them with the test format and the types of questions they may be asked on the day.
Our practice tests can also be a great way for parents to identify their child’s strengths and weaknesses. Parents can then adjust their child’s revision to focus on improving their weaker areas. As the test approaches, we’d suggest that pupils take our tests under exam conditions so they get used to answering questions under time pressure.
For Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Sir William Borlase’s 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Sir William Borlases’s 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1947, Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School is a co-educational grammar school located in Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire. The school is situated close to Aylesbury College and the new Aylesbury Technical College. One of three grammar schools in Aylesbury, it is named after Sir Henry Floyd, who was a Lord Lieutenant of Buckinghamshire. The school educates students aged between 11 and 18 and has its largest intake of pupils in Year 7.
The school offers its students excellent facilities, particularly in performing arts. It has its own dedicated performing arts building with a theatre, music practice rooms and a recording studio. The school also has a modern library with a range of multimedia resources. Sir Henry Floyd offers an extensive range of sporting activities, including football, rugby, hockey, cricket, netball, tennis and athletics.
For an insight into academic life at Sir Henry Floyd, take a look at this ‘personal views’ video, created by the school:
11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School
Address: Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School, Oxford Road, Aylesbury, HP21 8PE.
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk, 01296 424781
School Type: Co-educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,030 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
Admission to Year 7 at Sir Henry Floyd is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is designed to select students based on academic ability.
Created by GL Assessment, the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
More information about the admissions process at Sir Henry Floyd Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
The school holds regular Open Events throughout the year for parents and prospective students that want to visit the school before applying. The Open Events include a presentation from the Headteacher and a tour of the school. To book a place at one of the Open Events, parents need to visit http://www.schoolinterviews.co.uk/ and enter the relevant event code. Alternatively, parents can contact the school by calling 01296 424781, or by emailing office@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk.
The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after students and previously looked after students
- Students who qualify for Free School Meals
- Pupils who qualify for a Pupil Premium grant
- Students who already have a brother or sister at the school
- Siblings of former students at the school
- Students who live within the school’s catchment area
- Pupils that live closest to the school
Sir Henry Floyd has a waiting list, where pupils are ranked again in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.
Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.
How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School
Children who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Students who attend a partner school, or live outside of the school’s catchment area, need to be registered online. Parents can complete the Registration Form on the school’s website and email it to admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk Parents will then receive email confirmation of their child’s registration.
For more information on how to register for a Year 7 Place at Sir Henry Floyd, parents can call Mrs. Willoughby, or Mrs. Morey on 01296 424781 or email admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk.
Results from the 11 Plus Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.
Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format
Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers that focus on the following topics:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths skills
Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised to ensure that no student has an unfair advantage based on their age. In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Sir Henry Floyd, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.
As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus exam that they will take.
For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test?
The best way to prepare for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test is to be organised. We encourage parents to help their child create a study schedule that outlines what topics need to be covered and when. By approaching test preparation in a structured way, students are more likely to feel confident on test day.
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice tests that help students prepare for grammar school exams, like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Sir Henry Floyd. Our practice tests benefit students by familiarising them with the format of the test and getting them used to the types of questions that they may be asked.
We’d recommend that parents introduce our tests early into their child’s revision so that any weak areas are identified early. As their studying progresses, our practice tests can then be used to monitor their progress and build confidence.
For the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1893, John Hampden Grammar School, known as ‘JHGS’ for short, is a selective state boys’ grammar school that educates students aged between 11 and 18. Located in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire, the school is named after the English Civil War commander and local Member of Parliament, John Hampden.
In 2011, the school became an Academy and in previous years has been rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted. Known for providing excellent sports facilities, John Hampden Grammar School offers hockey, rugby, climbing and Rock-it-Ball as extra-curricular sporting activities.
For an insight into academic life at John Hampden’s, take a look at this short welcome video:
11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for John Hampden Grammar School
Address: John Hampden Grammar School, Marlow Hill, High Wycombe, HP11 1SZ
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: office@jhgs.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 529589
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,036 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
John Hampden Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
Year 7 entry to John Hampden Grammar School is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The 11+ test is produced by the exam board GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
More information about the admissions process at John Hampden Grammar School is available on the school’s website, as well as the Local Authority website.
For more details on the Secondary Transfer Test, parents are encouraged to contact the Admissions Team at Buckinghamshire County Council on 01296 388222, or by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk.
John Hampden Grammar School encourages all parents and prospective pupils interested in applying to the school, to arrange a visit. Visits typically include a tour of the school and the opportunity to meet with staff members. To arrange a visit to John Hampden Grammar, parents should contact the school office to make an appointment, on 01494 529589, or by emailing office@jhgs.bucks.sch.uk.
The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked after or previously looked after boys
- Students eligible for Pupil Premium or Free School Meals
- Students who have brothers that already attend the school
- Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
- Students that live closest to the school
John Hampden Grammar School also has a waiting list system in place. Students who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.
John Hampden Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.
How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to John Hampden Grammar School
Students that live within the school’s catchment area are automatically registered for a Year 7 place, unless parents withdraw them from the application process.
In all other cases, parents need to make an application for testing to the Testing Administrator, using the Bucks online application portal by the deadline date. Parents should also inform their home local authority by completing a Common Application Form (CAF), stating their child’s school preference. The CAF should be sent alongside evidence of the boys’ home address.
As with all 11+ Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.
John Hampden Grammar School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Format
John Hampden Grammar School uses the 11+ exam to determine Year 7 entry.
The test is used to assess the academic suitability of candidates. There are two test papers that focus on:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths
Each test is multiple choice and lasts approximately 45 minutes. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at John Hampden Grammar School, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above. Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.
Two days before the 11 plus Secondary Transfer test, pupils will have the opportunity to take two practice tests in order to become familiar with the layout of the actual exam.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus School Secondary Transfer Test?
When it comes to preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the sooner students start revising, the more time they’ll have to improve before test day. We’d advise that parents create a study schedule with their son that maps out what needs to be covered. As the test approaches, the schedule can be adjusted to focus on specific areas that need improving.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help pupils prepare for independent and grammar school entrance exams, like the Secondary Transfer Test at John Hampden Grammar. Our practice tests help familiarise students with the format of the entrance exam and get them used to the types of questions they may be asked in the two test papers.
As the exam date approaches, our practice tests can be taken under exam conditions to help students improve their time managements skills. As each test paper on the day lasts 45 minutes, students need to get used to answering questions quickly, under time pressure.
For for the John Hampden Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about John Hampden Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established in 1548, Royal Grammar School High Wycombe (RGSHW for short) is a selective boys’ grammar school in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire. The school became an Academy in 2011. Parents do not need to pay fees for their child to attend and admission is based on pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.
The school educates boys aged between 11 and 18 and offers day and boarding places. It is a DfES-designated Language College, as well as a Mathematics and ICT College. In previous years, the school has achieved Grade 1 in every area of Ofsted inspections and it regularly produces some of the best GCSE and A-Level results in England.
For an insight into academic life at Royal Grammar School, take a look at this Year 7 welcome video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Royal Grammar School
Address: Royal Grammar School, Amersham Road, High Wycombe, HP13 6QT
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: 01494 524955
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1.358 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 192 (182 day places, 10 boarding places)
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
Royal Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
For boys that wish to board at Royal Grammar School, parents need to complete the school’s Boarding Registration Form, which can be requested from the school. A Common Application Form (CAF) also needs to be completed and returned to the Local Authority.
Before boarding places are allocated, boys and their parents are invited to an interview with the Head of Boarding to see if the student will benefit from a boarding environment.
Admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council.
More information about the admissions process for day places at Royal Grammar School is available on the school’s website here, and for boarding places here.
If parents have any questions about the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
The school has an Open Event for prospective students and their parents to meet the Senior Teaching Team. The event includes presentations, a tour of the school campus and a tour of the boarding facilities.
The school often receives more applications for day places than can be accommodated. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after and previously looked after boys
- Boys living in the catchment area of the school
- Boys who already have a brother at the school
- Boys who are in receipt of Free School Meals
- Boys whose parents are employed by the school
Information on the boarding oversubscription criteria can be found on the school website here.
Royal Grammar School also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.
Royal Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The school website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.
How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Royal Grammar School
Students who attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Those that attend a partner school need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal. Those who attend a primary school outside the Local Authority also need to register for testing and will sit the test at a central location in Buckinghamshire.
Results from the 11 plus exam are sent to parents before the end of October.
Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam: Secondary Transfer Test Format
Year 7 entry to Royal Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Secondary Transfer Test. There are two test papers. The first focuses on comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning. The second focuses on non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths.
Each test lasts approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The exams are weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.
The minimum qualifying score for the Secondary Transfer Test is 121 and students need to achieve this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Royal Grammar School.
As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam to familiarise themselves with its format.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the 11 plus Royal Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?
The sooner students start studying for the test, the more time they will have to improve any weak areas. At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend a structured approach to preparing for the test that includes a combination of topic revision and practice test papers.
Parents should create a study schedule with their child to ensure that they cover all the topics they need to know. As test day approaches, the schedule can be adjusted to focus on any areas that need improving.
We publish practice tests that help students prepare for entrance exams like the 11 plus Royal Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test. We believe that a little practice can go a long way to improving a student’s confidence.
Not only do our practice tests help familiarise students with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test but they help them identify the types of questions that they could be asked on the day. As both test papers last 45 minutes, students need to be confident that they can answer as many questions as possible within the allocated time. As test day approaches, we’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed conditions to get used to answering questions quickly under time pressure.
For the Royal Grammar School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Established in 1962, Dr Challoner’s High School, also known as DCHS for short, is a girls’ grammar school for pupils aged between 11 and 18. Located in Little Chalfont, Buckinghamshire, the school was formed when it split from Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, which became an all boys’ school.
Dr Challoner’s High has specialist school status as a Sports College and has a second specialism as a Language College. It also has academy status. An affiliate member of the Girls’ Schools Association, DCHS achieved the Exceptional Schools Award in 2014. In previous years, the school has also been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. DCHS operates a house system where students compete throughout the year in a range of activities. The five houses are: Bronte, Curie, Nightingale, Pankhurst, and Teresa – all named after inspirational women in history.
For an insight into academic life at Dr Challoner’s High School, take a look at this fundraising film that showcases the school’s achievements:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Dr Challoner’s High School
Address: Dr Challoner’s High School, Cokes Lane, Little Chalfont, HP7 9QB
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: office@challonershigh.com, 01494 763296
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,042 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment
Dr Challoner’s High School Year 7 11+ Admissions
Dr Challoner’s High School is a fully selective grammar school for girls and Year 7 entry is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment. Admissions to the school are administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
More information about the admissions process at Dr Challoner’s High is available on the school’s website here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
Because the Secondary Transfer Test is new at Dr Challoner’s High School, parents are encouraged to contact the Admissions Team at the local authority if they have any questions. The team can be contacted by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
Dr Challoner’s High School holds Open Mornings throughout the year for parents and prospective students. The mornings include a tour of the school campus and the opportunity to meet members of staff. Places are limited so parents should contact the school on 01494 763296 to reserve a place.
The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Students who have statements of Special Educational Needs
- Looked after or previously looked after girls
- Students who live in the school’s catchment area
- Students who are entitled to free school meals
- Students who have a sister already at the school
- Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
- Students that live closest to the school
Dr Challoner’s High also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.
The school’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.
How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Dr Challoner’s High School
Children who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered and will sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test in their current school. Those who attend partner schools, and schools outside the catchment area, need to be registered for testing through the Bucks online application portal. Exam results are sent to parents before the end of October.
Dr Challoner’s High School Secondary Transfer Test Exam Format
Dr Challoner’s High School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. The test aims to select the most academically suitable children. It consists of two test papers. The first paper tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students. In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Dr Challoner’s High School, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.
As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests two days before the actual exam to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Dr Challoner’s High School Secondary Transfer Test?
In order to prepare successfully for the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, students need to be organised with a revision schedule. We advise that parents should help their child create a schedule that ensures they cover each topic before the test.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help children prepare for entrance exams like the Secondary Transfer Test at Dr Challoner’s High School. We suggest that parents introduce practice tests into their child’s revision early, as a means of identifying any weak areas. The more practice tests students complete, the more confident they will feel on test day.
Our practice tests help improve students’ confidence by familiarising them with the format of the test and helping them identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day. As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d advise students to take our practice tests under exam conditions as a way of improving their time managements skills.
For the Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Dr Challoner’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1919, Woodford County High School (WCHS) is a selective all-girls grammar based in the London Borough of Redbridge. The school teaches a broad, stimulating academic curriculum to over 800 girls and prides itself on providing a diverse, friendly and innovative environment for pupils to flourish.
WCHS teaches the skills required for modern life and provides its pupils with the latest technology and first-rate facilities to achieve this outcome. Woodford County High School for Girls is a sought-after grammar for Year 7 entry.
11 Plus Exam Information for Woodford County High School for Girls
Address: Woodford County High School, High Road, Woodford Green IG8 9LA
County: London Borough of Redbridge
Admissions Info: enquiries@woodford.redbridge.sch.uk, 020 8504 0611
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 853 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admissions to Woodford County High School for Girls are managed by the local authority, the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR). There is plenty of competition for the 180 Year 7 places at WCHS, so parents are advised to visit the school ahead of registration.
In the event of there being more applicants than available Year 7 places, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after and previously looked after children
- Children living in the school’s catchment area who are entitled to the Pupil Premium (up to 18 places)
- Other children living in the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit
- Children living outside the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit.
You can find more details of WCHS’s admissions process and catchment area via the school’s website here.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Woodford County High School for Girls
Year 7 admission to Woodford County High School for Girls is based on the results of an eleven plus exam entrance test. To be eligible to sit this exam, parents must register their daughter before the closing date via the LBR’s website. LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances, and there is no waiting list available either.
Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Woodford County High School for Girls uses the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by University of Durham. This 11+ test covers:
- Verbal Reasoning, including vocabulary and comprehension
- Non-Verbal Reasoning, testing the ability to see how objects relate to each other
- Numerical Reasoning, testing the ability to solve maths problems
The tests are multiple choice and the results are fully standardised and age weighted to ensure fairness for all candidates.
How to Prepare for the Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
To gain one of the 180 Year 7 places at Woodford County High School for Girls, students need to be fully prepared ahead of the exam and have a solid understanding of what type of test questions to expect. Our guide to studying for the 11+ exam will help parents and students to ensure that everything is covered ahead of the tests.
The WCHS eleven plus exam tests children’s reasoning ability (numerical, verbal and non-verbal). If students need some additional work in this area, we would also suggest reading the following articles:
Parents should also try to introduce practice exam papers into their daughter’s revision routine early, ideally under timed conditions.
For Woodford County High School for Girls 11 plus revision, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
- 11+ Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Maths Long Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Maths Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning CEM
- 11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ Comprehension CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ Comprehension CEM (Pack 2)
- 11+ Cloze CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ English Spelling
The information provided about Woodford County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1911, Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is a girls-only grammar that teaches over 700 pupils aged 11-18. Previously a Language College, it became an academy in 2014. Pupils are split across four houses – Audley, Ferrers, Paget and Stafford. Throughout each school year, the houses compete in a range of activities, including sport, music and the House Arts Festival.
The school offers a broad extracurricular programme to help girls engage in all aspects of school life. As well as an impressive sport selection, pupils can participate in residential trips across the world and become involved in the school’s various music opportunities.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wolverhampton Girls’ High School
Address: Wolverhampton High School for Girls, Tettenhall Road, Tettenhall, Wolverhampton WV6 0BY
County: West Midlands – Wolverhampton
Admissions Info: enquiries@wghs.org.uk, 01902 551515
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 741 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 145
Open Day Date: April
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham): Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Consortium
Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions
Admission to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 145 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.
Late candidates will only be considered following the initial allocation of places, so it is always advised to meet the registration deadline in the first instance.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children eligible for the Pupil Premium
- Children who live nearest to the school
Learn more about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School Year 7 admissions process via its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Wolverhampton’s Girls’ High School, parents need to register their daughter well in advance of the year of entry. Applications are completed online via the school website, here. Parents must complete two forms for eleven plus entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form and the Local Authority (LA) form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the LA directly by the deadline date specified on the form.
Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ exam for Wolverhampton Girls’ follows the same structure as other grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. The exam will test:
The four subjects are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes, with each test divided into individually timed sections.
How to Prepare for the Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?
One of the most effective ways to prepare for the 11 Plus exam at Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is to use practice exam papers. Not only do they help identify a child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can also help to improve their time management skills.
All of our practice papers come complete with answers, so parents can accurately measure their child’s performance from session-to-session. We have a selection of 11 Plus exam papers to choose from to help students prepare for entry to Wolverhampton Girls.
We specifically recommend the following resources:
- Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM English Cloze Test (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus CEM English Comprehension (Pack 1)
- Eleven Plus English Spelling CEM
- Eleven Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- Eleven Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1624, Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, known as DCGS, is a selective grammar school for boys with a co-educational sixth form. Located in Amersham, in Buckinghamshire, the school gained academy status in 2011. The school operates a house system, with each house named after a previous headteacher.
Dr Challoner’s is one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools and competition for Year 7 entry is high. Known for producing outstanding GCSE results, DCGS also offers a range of extra-curricular activities and has an impressive list of former pupils.
For an insight into academic life at Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Dr Challoner’s Grammar School
Address: Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, Chesham Rd, Amersham, HP6 5HA
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: admissions@challoners.com, 01494 787500
School Type: Co-educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,281 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
From 2018, admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which aims to select based on academic ability.
The Secondary Transfer test is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
More information about the admissions process at Dr Challoner’s Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test 11 plus exam, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
Dr Challoner’s Grammar School holds Open Mornings three times a year until the summer term. These mornings include a presentation from the Headteacher, as well as a tour of the school campus. Parents and prospective students will also have the opportunity to meet staff members and current pupils. It should be noted that places on these open mornings are limited, so the school advises that parents reserve a place beforehand by contacting the school on 01494 787500.
As one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools, competition for 11 plus entry in Year 7 is high. The school website states that in 2017, of the 530 qualified applicants, 233 listed DCGS as their first preference. The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after children or previously looked after children
- Students who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
- Pupils with a brother who already attends the school and lives within the catchment area
- Boys who live closest to the school.
Dr Challoner’s Grammar also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.
Dr Challoner’s Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The school website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.
How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Dr Challoner’s Grammar School
Pupils who currently attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to take Dr Challoner’s 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. However, parents still need to complete and return the school’s Supplementary Information Form, which is available to download from the school website, here.
Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area and wish to attend Dr Challoner’s Grammar, need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal.
As with all Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.
Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format
Dr Challoner’s Grammar School uses the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first, tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Maths section – 25%
Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.
In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Dr Challoner’s, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.
As with other Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar 11 plus (11+) exam?
Preparing for the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test takes practice. Students who have prepared for the test in an organised way are more likely to have a competitive edge over their peers. At Exam Papers Plus, we advise parents to create a revision timetable with their child to ensure that each topic is covered in detail. The sooner pupils start preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.
We specialise in publishing practice tests for grammar and independent school entry, and our resources can be used to prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test. Not only do our practice tests help familiarise students with the layout of entrance exams, they also help them to identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day of the tests.
We’d recommend that parents introduce our tests early in their child’s revision as they can be a great way to identify weaker areas. Once parents know where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie, they can adjust their revision timetable to suit.
In the lead up to the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we’d recommend that students complete our tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under time pressure.
For Dr Challoner’s Grammar School’s 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Dr Challoner’s Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Dr Challoner’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.
Founded in 1960, Burnham Grammar School, known as BGS for short, is a co-educational grammar school that educates students aged between 11 and 18, located in Burnham, in Buckinghamshire. In 2011, the school gained academy status. Burnham Grammar is also a Specialist Science College.
The school operates a house system, where students compete throughout the academic year in various sporting and extra-curricular activities. Students are split over four houses, each named after an influential historical figure. The four houses are Winton (named after Nicholas Winton), Roosevelt (Eleanor Roosevelt), King (Martin Luther King, Jr), and Ali (Muhammad Ali).
For an insight into academic life at Burnham Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Burnham Grammar School
Address: Burnham Grammar School, Hogfair Lane, Burnham, SL1 7HG
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: info@burnhamgrammar.org.uk, 01628 604812
School Type: Co-educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 879 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: June, September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Burnham Grammar School Year 7 Admissions
From 2018, Year 7 admission to Burnham Grammar is determined by how pupils perform in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. This 11 plus exam is designed to identify students with the aptitude and ability for an education at Burnham.
The test is produced by the exam board, GL Assessment and is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme. Burnham Grammar School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium.
With 150 Year 7 places available at the school, competition for entry is high. However, as the school’s website states, in the last 5 years, all Year 7 students who live within 10 miles of the school have been allocated places.
As with all Buckinghamshire schools, applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Burnham Grammar School outlines its full admissions policy on its website, here. Further information on the Bucks schools’ admissions, can be found on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
Further questions about the Secondary Transfer Test should be directed to the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
Burnham Grammar School also runs open events from late September through to October. These events provide parents and prospective students with the opportunity to learn more about what the school has to offer. The events also include a tour of the school, where parents and students can see its facilities, and speak to members of staff.
For more information on how to book one of the open events, please see the school’s current prospectus.
Although all students within the school’s catchment area typically receive Year 7 places, where there are more applicants than available places, the school gives priority to:
- Looked After, or previously looked after children
- Children who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
- Pupils who live within the catchment area in the year preceding admission
- Students who have a brother or sister that already attends the school
- Children with exceptional medical or social needs
- Students who qualify for Free School Meals
- Pupils who live closest to the school
Burnham Grammar also operates a waiting list when the school is oversubscribed. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.
If students are refused entry on the basis that the school is full, parents can make a representation to an Independent Appeal Panel. For appeals information, please visit the Bucks County Council website, here.
Burnham Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.
How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Burnham Grammar School
Students who currently attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to take the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, unless parents withdraw them from the testing process. However, parents do need to name Burnham Grammar School on their child’s Local Authority Preference Form and return it before the deadline date.
Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal. Burnham School estimates that approximately 50% of its Year 7 population is made up of students from outside the catchment area.
Results of the Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.
For more information on the Bucks admissions procedure, please contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.
Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format
Burnham Grammar School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. The exam consists of two test papers. The first focuses on comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning. The second test paper is made up of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
All questions are multiple-choice and each test lasts approximately 45 minutes. The 11+ Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills – 50%
- Non-verbal – 25%
- Maths– 25%
At Burnham Grammar School, the Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6. The tests are also age standardised to ensure fairness to all students. For more information on the test dates at Burnham, please follow this link.
Although the Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark, students do need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above to be considered for a Year 7 place at Burnham Grammar School.
As with all other Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the 11+ Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?
The sooner students start preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas before test day. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help pupils prepare for grammar school entrance exams, like the 11 plus exam at Burnham Grammar. Introducing our tests early in a child’s revision can help identify their weak areas. Once parents know where their child needs to improve, they can adjust their revision schedule to suit.
Our practice tests also help familiarise students with the types of questions that they’re likely to be asked in the test. As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d advise students to take our papers under test conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under time pressure.
For the Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources that have been specifically designed with this test in mind:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Burnham Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Burnham Grammar School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Burnham Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.
Beaconsfield High School, known locally as Becky High, is a girls’ grammar school based in Beaconsfield, in Buckinghamshire. The school educates girls aged between 11 and 18. Admission to Beaconsfield is determined by student performance in the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test. With approximately 1,100 students at the school, and 180 Year 7 places available, competition for entry is high.
The school operates a house system, where girls compete in a range of activities throughout the academic year. Beaconsfield High School offers a range of modern facilities, including 60 classrooms and a ‘sixth form area’ with an additional 12 classrooms. The school has a fully equipped computer room and a sixth form common room.
For a virtual tour of Beaconsfield High School, take a look at this short video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Beaconsfield High School
Address: Beaconsfield High School, Wattleton Road, Beaconsfield, HP9 1RR
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: garcia-b@beaconsfieldhigh.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 673043
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,100 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Beaconsfield High School Year 7 Admissions
Beaconsfield High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, admission to Year 7 is dependent on pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The exam board for the test is GL Assessment and it is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
As with all Buckinghamshire schools, applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Beaconsfield High School outlines its full admissions policy on its website, here, and further information is provided on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.
Parents who have further questions about about the Secondary Transfer Test should contact the Admissions Team by email at office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
Beaconsfield High School encourages parents and prospective students to visit the school ahead of taking the admissions test. The school organises campus tours three times a week during term time, except during May and June, when public exams take place. The tours are carried out by current pupils of the school. These tours provide parents with the opportunity to see the facilities on offer and to meet members of staff. To book a tour, please email reception@beaconsfieldhigh.bucks.sch.uk.
As competition for Year 7 entry to the school is high, Beaconsfield often uses its oversubscription criteria to allocate places. In such instances, where there are more applicants than available places, the school gives priority to:
- Girls who are looked after, or previously looked after
- Students who live within the school’s catchment area and are entitled to free school meals
- Pupils who have a sister that already attends Beaconsfield High School
- Girls who live closest to the school
- Students with a sister at the school
- Pupils who live outside the catchment area in order of distance from the school
Beaconsfield also operates a waiting list when the school is over-subscribed.
How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Beaconsfield High School
Girls who currently attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, unless parents withdraw them from the testing process.
Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area, or don’t attend one of Beaconsfield’s partner schools, should register their child using the Bucks online application portal, regardless of where they live. The application portal can be accessed on the Grammar Schools and Transfer Test page of the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
Results of the Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.
Parents who require information on the application process at Beaconsfield High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.
Beaconsfield High School Secondary Transfer Test Format
The 11 plus Beaconsfield High School Secondary Transfer Test has two test papers that consist of:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning.
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and mathematics.
Each test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes. All questions are multiple-choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. The 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:
- Verbal skills section – 50%
- Non-verbal section – 25%
- Mathematics section – 25%
At Beaconsfield High School, the Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6, with all children taking the test on the same day, regardless of whether they live within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. The tests are also age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test dates, please visit the Beaconsfield High School website, here.
It should also be noted that the Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark. Instead, students need to achieve a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students need to meet this score or be deemed qualified by a Selection Review Panel in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Beaconsfield High School.
Parents of students that do not achieve the qualifying score can apply for a Selection Review if they believe that there is a good reason for their child’s under performance. The Selection Review consists of serving secondary school teachers, retired secondary teachers and primary Heads.
As with all Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Beaconsfield High School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test?
When it comes to preparing for the Beaconsfield High School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, it’s best to start revision early. We’d recommend that parents help their daughter create a revision timetable that outlines what needs to be studied and when. The more organised students are in their preparation, the more confident they’ll feel going into the exam.
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice tests that help children prepare for grammar school exams, like the Secondary Transfer Test at Beaconsfield. Our practice tests can help students become better acquainted with the types of questions that may be asked in the two tests.
In the lead up to the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we’d advise students to take our practice tests under timed conditions, to help improve their time management skills and to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.
For the Beaconsfield High School 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Beaconsfield High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Beaconsfield High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Beaconsfield High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.
Founded in 1959, Aylesbury High School, known as AHS, is an all-girls’ grammar school located in Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire. The school was formed when Aylesbury Grammar School split into two single-sex grammar schools. With a catchment area that includes Oxford and Milton Keynes, admission to AHS is determined by pupil performance in the Secondary Transfer Test.
The school operates a house system, where students compete throughout the year in a range of activities. The six houses at Aylesbury High School are Ascott, Claydon, Hughenden, Missenden, Stowe, and Waddesdon. The school gained academy status in 2011.
For an insight into academic life at Aylesbury High School, take a look at this short promotional video:
Secondary Transfer Test Information for Aylesbury High School
Address: Aylesbury High School, Walton Road, Aylesbury, HP21 7SX
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions Info: office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, 01296 388222
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,290 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January, March
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Aylesbury High School Year 7 Admissions
Aylesbury High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, Year 7 entry is determined by pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test,. The test is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.
Applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Full details of Aylesbury High School’s admissions process can be found on Buckinghamshire County Council’s website, here, and on the school’s website. Any further enquiries about the Secondary Transfer Test should be directed to the Admissions Team by email at office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Aylesbury High School, parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Mornings, which take place in January and March. The Open Mornings include a tour of the school, where parents and prospective students will have the opportunity to speak to current pupils and staff members. To book one of the mornings, parents are advised to contact the school receptionist Mrs Onley, at sonley@ahs.bucks.sch.uk.
In such cases that there are more applicants than available places at Aylesbury High School, it uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after girls and previously looked after girls.
- Students who have a sister already at the school.
- Pupils who have a brother that attends Aylesbury Grammar School.
- Girls who qualify for Free School Meals and live in the catchment area.
- Students that live within the catchment area of the school.
- Girls that live closest to the school.
From 2018, a waiting list will be maintained until the end of August by Aylesbury High School itself for Year 7 admissions.
How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Aylesbury High School
Girls who already attend a Buckinghamshire primary school will be automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry to Aylesbury High School. For students that live outside of the school’s catchment area, details of how to register are made available on the Buckinghamshire County Council website before registration opens.
11+ test results are sent to parents before the end of October, when secondary school applications need to be submitted. Further information on how students that live out with the catchment area can apply, is available on the local authority’s registration portal.
Parents who require information on the application process at Aylesbury High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.
Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test Format
The new Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test at 11+ consists of two test papers:
- Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning questions.
- Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.
All questions are multiple-choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. Each Secondary Transfer Test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes, with each correct answer gaining one raw mark. The verbal skills section has the most weighting at 50%, with the non-verbal and maths sections each weighted at 25%.
At Aylesbury High School, the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is taken by students in September of Year 6, with all children taking the test on the same day, whether they are within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. The tests are age standardised to ensure that no students have an advantage based on their age.
The Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark but does have a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students need to meet this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Aylesbury High School. It should be noted however, that achieving the Secondary Transfer Test Score (STTS), does not guarantee a place at the school. Each grammar school in Buckinghamshire sets its own additional admissions criteria.
Before taking the Secondary Transfer Test, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam. The practice test aims to give students the experience of taking a test under exam conditions and to help familiarise them with the layout of the 11+ STT.
For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.
How to Prepare for the Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test?
Given the competition for Year 7 entry to Aylesbury High School, parents should ensure that their child is fully prepared for the Secondary Transfer Test. We would advise that parents and students create a study schedule well ahead of the test date, to ensure that each aspect of the test syllabus is covered.
The more confident a student feels going into the exam hall, the more likely they are to perform well. Students who are organised with a study schedule will have a competitive advantage over their peers who approach the test in a lesser structured way.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help children prepare for grammar and independent school admission exams, like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Aylesbury High School. Our practice papers aim to familiarise students with the types of questions that they could be asked in each of the test papers.
When taken under exam conditions, our practice tests can be a great way to identify any weaker areas that may need improving in the lead up to the tests. Once parents know where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie, they can adjust their study schedule accordingly.
For the 11 plus Aylesbury High School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:
Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Aylesbury High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5
Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Aylesbury High School 11 plus exam:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ English: Spelling Pack 1
11+ English: Spelling Pack 2
11+ English: Punctuation
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Aylesbury High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in Wallington, Wilson’s School is a boys-only selective grammar that teaches over 1,000 pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1615, Wilson’s is one of the oldest state schools in the UK. The school became an academy in 2011 and consistently appears in the top 10 schools in the country for both GCSE and A-Level results.
Alongside a traditional curriculum, the school offers a strong co-curricular programme, with particular emphasis placed on sport and music. In fact, the school has an established programme of free vocal tuition or specialist instrumental tuition on a wind instrument for every pupil in Year 7.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wilson’s Grammar School
Address: Wilson’s Grammar School, Mollison Drive, Wallington SM6 9JW
County: London – Borough of Sutton
Admissions Info: admissions@wilsonsschool.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8773 2931
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,061 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: September (Part One) and October (Part Two)
Exam Board Type: Part One, Selective Eligibility Test (SET), Part Two, set by school
Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Wilson’s Grammar School is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme, where admission is solely determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. With 180 places available in Year 7, the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of its open events. At these events, parents will learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.
Schools within the Borough of Sutton are consistently oversubscribed, so in the likely event of there being more applications than there are places at Wilson’s School, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children by rank order of standardised school in the entrance tests
- Boys eligible for Free School Meals (up to 10 places) by rank order of standardised school in the entrance tests
- Any remaining places will be allocated to boys according to their position in the rank order of standardised score in the entrance tests
Parents are advised to read Wilson’s admissions criteria before taking their son’s application further.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilson’s Grammar School
Parents who wish to register their son to sit the SET (Part One) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Parents must also complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London or Surrey can complete the CAF online.
If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit the Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should they pass this test, they must include Wilson’s School on the CAF to be eligible for consideration for a Year 7 place.
Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Wilson’s Grammar School 11+ tests are split into two stages:
- Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each last approximately 45 minutes.
This Selective Eligibility Test (SET) is run in conjunction with other grammar schools in Sutton such as Sutton Grammar School and Wallington County Grammar School. The result of the SET determines whether or not a boy is eligible for the second stage test.
- Stage 2: English and Mathematics – the English test includes an extended writing task and tests comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.
How to Prepare for the Wilson’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
Sutton-based selective grammar schools do not reveal information about their selection examinations. This can be daunting for parents ahead of the exam, but with a good revision plan and the use of practice papers, parents can give their son the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Wilson’s School.
To get ahead of the fierce competition at Wilson’s, we would recommend using the following practice tests, which have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:
Stage 1 (S.E.T)
Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
Eleven Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:
Eleven Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
Eleven Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
Eleven Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
Eleven Plus English: Spelling Pack 1
Eleven Plus English: Spelling Pack 2
Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
Eleven Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
Stage 2
For Stage 2, we would recommend the following packs:
Eleven Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
Eleven Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
The information provided about Wilson’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1931, Wirral Grammar School for Girls is an all-girls grammar based in Merseyside. Over 1,000 girls aged 11-18 attend the high-performing school, which has been rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted in every department.
Wirral Girls is a Specialist Language College, a Humanities College and a Science College. It is an academy that is proud to offer modern facilities to its staff and pupils. The school’s main vision is to provide a happy and stimulating environment for its pupils and does so by offering a challenging curriculum alongside a fun and friendly co-curricular programme.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral Grammar School for Girls
Address: Heath Road, Bebington, Wirral, CH63 3AF
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: schooloffice@wirralgirls.co.uk, 0151 644 8282
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,068
Number of Places in Year 7: 175
Open Day Date: May
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
All 175 Year 7 places at Wirral Grammar School for Girls are allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Before applying for a place, it is suggested that parents visit the school at one of its open events, where they can ask questions about the admissions process before committing any further.
With over eight applications for each Year 7 place, it is likely that the school will be oversubscribed. In such cases, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Girls in public care
- Girls with a valid medical reason (doctor’s letter must be supplied)
- Girls with a sister attending the school at the time of application
- Girls with a parent who works at the school for a minimum of two years
- Distance from the home address to the school
The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wirral Grammar School for Girls
Wirral Grammar School for Girls is one of four schools based in Wirral that follow a coordinated scheme for secondary school admissions. This is maintained by Wirral Council, the Local Authority (LA). To apply for a Year 7 grammar place, complete this admissions form in the first instance.
Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.
Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
The Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11+ exam consists of two papers that each last around 50 minutes. Both are made-up of a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering:
Test results are fully age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.
How to Prepare for the Wirral Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
For your daughter to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Wirral Grammar School for Girls, she should invest additional time in revision on top of her usual school work. Children are shown to respond better to shorter bursts of revision, so just 15-20 minutes each day can make a real difference to her knowledge ahead of the exam.
A great way to highlight any knowledge gaps ahead of the eleven plus is to use practice exam papers as part of their revision. These 11+ papers come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their daughter’s performance and track her improvements in the lead-up to the exam.
For pupils preparing for the Wirral Grammar School for Girls entrance exam, we have several 11 plus practice papers that can help:
11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)
11 Plus Cloze (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling (CEM)
The information provided about Wirral Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1958, Wilmington Grammar School for Girls (WGSG) is a Kent-based selective grammar with a co-educational Sixth Form for girls aged 11-18. An academy school, WGSG was awarded specialist status for maths and computing in 2004.
Alongside a traditional curriculum, the school offers its pupils the chance to develop skills and gain experience through several extracurricular activities including choir practice, acting lessons and a variety of sports.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wilmington Grammar School for Girls
Address: Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, Wilmington Grange, Parsons Lane, Wilmington, Dartford DA2 7BB
County: Kent
Admissions Info: enquiries@wgsg.co.uk, 01322 226351
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 930 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test
Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard. Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events to ask any questions they have about the admissions process. Parents may also take a tour of the school and meet staff and current pupils.
With 150 Year 7 places available at WGSG, the school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such instances, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in Local Authority Care
- Children with a sibling at the school
- Children with a brother at Wilmington Grammar School for Boys at the time of starting
- Children eligible for Pupil Premium
- Children who live within 1.5 miles of the school
- Up to 15 Governor places, for those children who have shown exceptional performance in mathematics
- Eligible children who live in the parishes outlined in this document
- All other girls
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilmington Grammar School for Girls
As Wilmington Grammar School for Girls uses the Kent Test as a means of selection in Year 7, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA) in the first instance.
Once students have taken the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive 11+ results from the Council by mid-October, with offers sent out in March.
If parents have any further queries about WGSG’s admissions process at Year 7, they are encouraged to email the school at enquiries@wgsg.co.uk or call 01322 226351.
Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam, including WGSG. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:
- An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
- A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Spatial reasoning
Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which will not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.
You can learn more about the Kent Test with these sample questions and gain further clarification on what to expect from the exam.
How to Prepare for the Wilmington Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for students to secure one of the 150 Year 7 places at Wilmington Grammar School for Girls, they should do additional revision on top of their usual homework.
Primary school children are shown to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period of time. Revision sessions should be manageable and split into ‘little and often’ study sessions.
The Kent Test requires children to have a solid knowledge of a number of subjects, so if parents suspect that their daughter has a weaker area, we recommend using practice exam papers to highlight these areas early on. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers early on as they can act as a diagnostic, highlighting strengths and weaknesses.
Girls sitting the Kent Test with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at WGSG will benefit from these resources:
Additionally, if students require further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, the following practice papers are ideal:
11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11 Plus Spelling (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about Wilmington Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1931, Wirral Grammar School for Boys is a selective grammar for students aged 11-18. Situated on a campus spread across nine acres in Bebington, the school has academy status and teaches in excess of 1,000 pupils.
While the school’s primary focus is to provide a strong academic grounding to its pupils, it does offer a diverse extracurricular programme outside of the classroom. Activities include student radio, an enterprise programme and charitable fundraising.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral Grammar School for Boys
Address: Cross Ln, Birkenhead, Bebington, Wirral, CH63 3AQ
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: schooloffice@wirralgrammarboys.com, 0151 644 0908
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,077 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 155
Open Day Date: Throughout the academic year
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
Prospective pupils living on the Wirral and in the surrounding county of Cheshire can apply for a Year 7 place at Wirral Grammar School for Boys.
With 155 places available, admission is based on student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Children who attend primary school on the Wirral can take the entrance test at their school, while pupils who live outside of the county can take the test at one of the Wirral’s four selective schools.
The school has reported over eight applications for each Year 7 place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, boys
- Boys with a valid medical reason, supported by a doctor’s letter
- Boys eligible for Free School Meals (up to 15 places)
- Boys who have a brother at the school at the time of application
- Shortest distance from a boy’s permanent residence to the school
For more information about Wirral Grammar School for Boys’ admissions procedure at Year 7, refer to the school’s website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wirral Grammar School for Boys
Wirral County Council administers the 11 Plus test for all four Wirral-based selective schools. This Local Authority (LA) recommends that parents apply for a Year 7 grammar place online, via its admissions form. Pupils living on the Wirral should apply directly to this LA, while those living in Cheshire should apply directly to Cheshire LA.
Parents will receive test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March the following year.
Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
Pupils sitting the 11 Plus test for Wirral Grammar School for Boys will be tested on:
Boys will sit two tests, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The tests will contain a mixture of multiple choice and standard format questions. Test results are fully age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.
How to Prepare for the Wirral Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
Eleven plus exam dates are set well in advance, giving students plenty of time to prepare for the tests. The sooner students start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their overall performance.
Before students begin their revision, we’d recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.
Competition for Year 7 places at Wirral Grammar for Boys is strong, so we recommend that students use practice exam papers as part of their general study routine. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the 11+ exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked on the day. They also help parents identify any weaker areas that may need improving.
For those sitting the Wirral Grammar School for Boys eleven plus exam, we recommend the following resources:
11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11+ CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about Wirral Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located on the Wirral in Merseyside, West Kirby Grammar School (WKGS) is a selective grammar for girls aged 11-18 with boys admitted into the school’s Sixth Form. Founded in 1913, the school achieved academy status in 2012.
Over 1,100 pupils are divided across six houses: Furniss, Gonner, Hudson, Paton, Stewart and Wallis. These houses compete throughout each school year across a range of events, including music shows and sports.
For an insight into academic life at West Kirby Grammar School, watch this short promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for West Kirby Grammar School
Address: West Kirby Grammar School Graham Road, West Kirby, Wirral, CH48 5DP
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: office@wkgs.net, 0151 632 3449
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,193 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Dates: September and May
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
West Kirby Grammar welcomes pupils from the Wirral and surrounding areas to apply for a place in Year 7. With 180 places available, admission is based on
student performance in the eleven plus exam. Those children who attend a Wirral-based primary will take the test at their school, while pupils who live outside of the county are able to take the test at one of the four Wirral selective schools.
The 11 Plus exam for WKGS is administered by Wirral County Council and follows the CEM Durham University exam format. Parents should be aware that good performance in the exam does not guarantee a place at the school, due to oversubscription.
In the event of there being more applications than there are places, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, girls
- Girls with a valid medical reason, supported by a doctor’s letter
- Girls eligible for Free School Meals (up to 15 places)
- Girls who have a sister at the school at the time of application
- Shortest distance from a girl’s permanent residence to the school
The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to West Kirby Grammar School
West Kirby Grammar is one of four Wirral-based schools that follow a coordinated scheme for secondary school admissions, maintained by Wirral Council, the Local Authority (LA).
The LA recommends parents apply for a Year 7 grammar place online, via its admissions form. Late applications will be directly dealt with by Wirral LA.
West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11 Plus exam at West Kirby Grammar School consists of two tests that will cover:
Each test lasts approximately 50 minutes and contains a mixture of multiple choice and standard format questions. Test results are age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.
How to Prepare for the West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
At Exam Papers Plus, we highly recommend preparing for the 11+ well ahead of the exam date. The sooner children start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their overall performance.
Parent should create a study timetable with their child to ensure that they cover everything they will need to know. To give students the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at West Kirby Grammar, we would also recommend introducing practice exam papers early into their additional study routine. Not only do practice papers enable parents to identify their child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can help them become familiar with the exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked.
As the exam date gets closer, parents should encourage their child to do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This will help students get used to answering questions under pressure, as will be required in the exam.
We specifically recommend the following resources for the West Kirby Grammar School 11 Plus exam:
Eleven Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
Eleven Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
Eleven Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
Eleven Plus Comprehension (CEM)
Eleven Plus Cloze (CEM)
Eleven Plus Spelling (CEM)
The information provided about West Kirby Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1954, Wilmington Grammar School for Boys (WGSB) is located in Dartford, Kent. Previously called Dartford Technical High School, it took on its grammar status in 1982. An academy school, over 900 pupils are split across five houses: Brunel, Darwin, Newton, Stevenson and Telford.
A specialist engineering school, WGSB has a strong emphasis on design technology, mathematics and physics. Alongside its traditional curriculum, the school runs a programme to help develop boys’ entrepreneurial skills, encouraging them to be at the forefront of innovation for modern life.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wilmington Grammar School for Boys
Address: Wilmington Grammar School for Boys, Common Lane, Wilmington, Dartford DA2 7DA
County: Kent
Admissions Info: office@wgsb.org.uk, 01322 223090
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 905 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam
Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at Wilmington Grammar School for Boys, prospective pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. There are 150 Year 7 places available at WGSB for Yeat 7 entry. Should applications for admission exceed this number, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in Local Authority Care
- Children with a sibling at the school when the child starts
- Governor places (up to 15, awarded to children who have shown exceptional performance in the Kent Test)
- Children eligible for Pupil Premium (who live within 3 miles of the school)
- Children who live within a 1.5-mile radius of the school and children who live within the parishes listed in this document
- All other boys
Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at WGSB have a right to appeal. The school’s website provides further information about the admissions process.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wilmington Grammar School for Boys
WGSB’s Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.
Once your son has taken the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March of the following year.
Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
Wilmington Grammar School for Boys is one of the Kent-based selective schools that use the Kent Test at 11 Plus. This exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:
- An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Children will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
- An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
- A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases and/or in appeals for a school place.
How to Prepare for the Wilmington Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
Kent has gained a reputation for being one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the UK, so to keep your son ahead of the competition, he must start his revision for the 11 Plus early. Parents should help create an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects. Ensure that time is allocated for play and relaxation too, as this is likely to keep your son more motivated throughout his revision periods.
For the Kent 11+ Test, practice exam papers should be an essential part of a child’s revision routine. These papers can help parents monitor their son’s progress and give children a much-needed confidence boost as the exam date approaches.
We have specifically designed the following practice resources for the Kent Test:
If students needs additional practice in a particular subject, we would highly recommend the following papers:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1
The information provided about Wilmington Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in Tonbridge, Kent, Weald of Kent Grammar School is a selective grammar for girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Tonbridge Technical High School for Girls, the school was established in its current form in 1982.
An academy school, it holds specialisms in languages and science and has had National Teaching School status since 2014. Although the school challenges its girls with a rigorous curriculum, it also gives students the opportunity to pursue their passions outside of the classroom.
To learn more about academic life at Weald of Kent, watch this short promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Weald of Kent Grammar School
Address: Weald of Kent Grammar School, Tudeley Lane, Tonbridge TN9 2JP
County: Kent
Admissions Info: school@wealdgs.org, 01732 373500
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,422 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 265 (175 at the Tonbridge site, 90 at the Sevenoaks Annexe)
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam
Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to Weald of Kent Grammar School is determined by pupil performance in the Kent eleven plus exam. In 2017, Weald of Kent Grammar School Academy Trust was granted permission to operate an annexe in Sevenoaks. This increased the number of Year 7 places to 265 overall, across two sites.
When the school is oversubscribed, it will give priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children with a sibling attending the school at the time the child starts
- Children with Health and Special Access Reasons
- Children entitled to Pupil Premium (up to 18 places)
- Children of permanent staff members at the school
- Children who live closest to the school
Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Weald of Kent Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at Weald of Kent Grammar School, parents must register their child for the Kent Test. Under the coordinated Admissions Scheme, run by Kent County Council, parents can name four schools on the Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF). Parents must express their preferences, and rank them accordingly.
Kent County Council coordinates all admission applications on behalf of the school. Should parents have any questions about the admissions process, they should contact the Council, rather than the school.
Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Weald of Kent Grammar uses the Kent Test at 11 Plus to allocate Year 7 places. Children will be tested on Reasoning, English and Maths and will have to complete a writing task.
The exam format is as follows:
- Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is broken down into three shorter sections and focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
- English and Maths: A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths sections will contain multiple choice questions covering a range of topics that pupils will have covered up to Year 6.
- Writing: This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases, or by headteachers during the place allocation stage.
How to Prepare for the Weald of Kent Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
For students to have the best chance of gaining a place at Weald of Kent Grammar School, they need to have a thorough revision plan in place well ahead of the exam date. Regular revision will give them a better chance of improving their exam technique, while increasing their subject knowledge and learning how to perform well under exam conditions.
Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress with our selection of practice exam papers. These papers can help students to prepare for the Kent Test at 11 plus. We would specifically recommend the three tests below, all of which have been created with the Kent Test in mind:
For additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about Weald of Kent Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in the London Borough of Sutton, Wallington County Grammar School is a boys-only grammar for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1927, the school gained academy status in 2011 and has a roll of over 800 pupils.
Rated across all areas as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school aims to build independent, self-motivated learners through a combination of a challenging curriculum and a selection of co-curricular activities, including sports, Student Council and various charitable events.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wallington County Grammar School
Address: Wallington County Grammar School, Croydon Road, Wallington SM6 7PH
County: London – Borough of Sutton
Admissions Info: admissions@wcgs.org.uk, 0208 647 2235
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 885 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Selective Eligibility Test (SET), Multiple Choice Maths and English
Wallington County Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Wallington County Grammar School is part of the Pan-London Coordinated Admissions Scheme, which means admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. With 150 places available at Year 7, the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which usually take place in July. At the open events, parents and students can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.
Wallington County Grammar is consistently oversubscribed, so in the likely event of there being more applications than there are places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children who are looked after by a local authority (LA)
- Children in rank order of performance in the SET
- Children eligible for free school meals (up to 15 places)
- Children who live in one of the school’s designated postcodes, as outlined in this document
- Children of permanent staff who work at the Folio Education Trust
Parents are advised to thoroughly read Wallington County Grammar’s admissions criteria before taking their son’s application further.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wallington County Grammar School
Parents who wish to register their son to sit the SET must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. To apply for a place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their LA.
Those who live in London, or Surrey, can complete the CAF online. Only one form needs to be completed, even if you are applying to more than one school in the Sutton area.
Parents will receive information on the outcome of the SET in late September.
Wallington County Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Unlike other schools in the Sutton area, Wallington County Grammar does not run a second stage entrance exam. Therefore, prospective pupils can expect to sit just one exam.
This exam consists of two multiple choice papers in maths and English, with each lasting approximately 45 minutes.
How to Prepare for the Wallington County Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
Wallington County Grammar School is one of the five fully-selective grammar schools in Sutton that don’t reveal the details of their entrance exam provider.
Using our online practice papers will help ensure that children have the best possible chance of securing a Year 7 place at Wallington County Grammar. Students should start their revision early and use these papers to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
Wallington County Grammar has reported that there are over 10 applications for each Year 7 place, so for students to get ahead of the competition, we would recommend using the following practice tests, which have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:
11+ Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11+ Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11+ Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11+ Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11+ Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
The information provided about Wallington County Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1929, Urmston Grammar School is a co-educational school located in Trafford, Greater Manchester. Before becoming an academy in 2010, Urmston Grammar was awarded High Performing Specialist School status in 2007 and then Language College status in 2008.
Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, Urmston Grammar regularly features in the top five per cent of schools in the UK. The school’s primary aim is to provide its 900+ pupils with a well-rounded education, to allow them to play a positive role in society.
11 Plus Exam Information for Urmston Grammar School
Address: Urmston Grammar School, Newton Road, Urmston, Manchester M41 5UG
County: Greater Manchester (Trafford)
Admissions Info: office@urmstongrammar.org.uk, 0161 748 2875
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 909 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus
Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Urmston Grammar is part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium and is responsible for its own Year 7 admissions. All four schools within the Consortium use the same eleven plus test. Admission to Urmston Grammar is determined by pupil performance in this exam.
Urmston Grammar has 150 Year 7 places and actively encourages parents and children to attend its open day in June, ahead of applying to the school. At this event, parents can learn more about the school’s curriculum and whether it is the best learning environment for their child.
In recent years, Urmston Grammar has been significantly oversubscribed for Year 7 places. In such cases, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- The top 20 scoring candidates in rank order
- Pupils entitled to Pupil Premium (approximately 10 places)
- Children with parents working at the school for 8+ years in continuous service
- Children who live closest to the school (approximately 120 places)
For more information about Urmston Grammar’s admissions policy, please visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Urmston Grammar School
To apply for a place at Urmston Grammar, parents must register their child for the school’s entrance examination. The online registration form is available on the school’s admissions page.
In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Urmston Grammar should be listed on the form in ranked order of preference.
Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The eleven plus exam at Urmston Grammar consists of two test papers, covering:
Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions. There will be a short break between the two papers.
To be in with a chance of gaining a Year 7 place at the school, children need a qualifying score of 334. The results of the entrance exam are posted to parents or guardians in October, with official place offers sent out in early March.
How to Prepare for the Urmston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
As a starting point, our in-depth guide to studying for the 11 Plus exam covers all the essential information that students will need for creating a revision plan. We’ve also written specific posts about the individual tests, including:
- An 11 Plus Guide to Maths
- 11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation
- 11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice
When preparing for any exam, it’s always best to start early. We highly recommend using practice exam papers to get an initial overview of a child’s current abilities and to identify their strengths and weaknesses.
As a student’s studying progresses, we’d suggest using these practice tests to see how they are improving. Completing timed practice tests in the run-up to the real exam will get students used to answering questions under exam conditions.
The practice papers that we produce come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements. We have several eleven plus practice papers that can help students prepare for entry to Urmston Grammar.
We recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11+ exam:
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Comprehension (CEM)
11+ Cloze (CEM)
The information provided about Urmston Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1912, Upton Court Grammar School is a co-educational selective school that achieved academy status in 2011. Previously known as Slough Grammar, it has specialisms in languages and science and is based in Slough, Berkshire. Over 1,000 students from a range of backgrounds are taught a varied curriculum, while the school invests in their overall wellbeing.
The school encourages its pupils to be creative, offering a variety of co-curricular activities such as music, drama and arts across the school year.
11 Plus Exam Information for Upton Court Grammar School
Address: Upton Court Grammar School, Lascelles Road, Slough, SL3 7PR
County: Berkshire
Admissions Info: office@uptoncourtgrammar.org.uk, 01753 522892
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,027 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 165
Open Day Date: May
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Upton Court Grammar has 165 Year 7 places available and admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. The school hosts an information evening in May where parents can learn more about the school’s admissions process.
Admissions to Upton Court Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools. Parents must register online ahead of their child’s eleven plus exam date.
In cases of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children eligible for Pupil Premium (up to 15 places)
- Children with parents who have worked at the school for two years or more
- Children attending the designated feeder schools
- Children in rank order of performance in the 11+ tests (120 places)
- Children within the closest proximity to the school
For more details about Upton Court’s feeder schools and further information about its admission criteria, visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Upton Court Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at Upton Court Grammar School, parents must first register their child with the Slough Consortium. Next, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF); this can be done online via Slough County Council.
As the school follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the eleven plus exam.
Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. The papers across all schools in the Slough Consortium are the same and cover a mixture of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.
Parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam online in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised and this is the score parents will receive.
How to Prepare for the Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
At Exam Papers Plus, we always advise starting 11 Plus preparation early. The sooner children begin a regular study routine, the more time they will have to get used to the types of questions that may be asked in the exam.
A ‘little but often’ approach usually works best when it comes to studying for the tests. By breaking down revision into small chunks, students can ensure that all the exam subjects are covered.
Practice exam papers are a great way to help children get used to the exam layout and the allocated times that they have for each paper. Parents should introduce practice papers early into their child’s revision in order to monitor their improvement as their studying progresses.
As exam day approaches, parents should encourage their child to complete timed practice papers to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.
We have several eleven plus practice papers that can help students prepare for the Upton Court Grammar School 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:
- 11 Plus CEM English Comprehension (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus CEM English Cloze Test (Pack 1)
- 11 Plus English Spelling Pack
- 11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
- 11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
- 11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
The information provided about Upton Court Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in the Wirral, Merseyside, Upton Hall School was founded in 1849 and is a girls-only Roman Catholic grammar school. An academy, Upton Hall not only has International School status, but is also a training school.
Providing a traditional curriculum, the school strives to give its pupils an all-round education and encourages them to be active members in the wider community. Girls are able to participate in a range of sporting activities and also various musical ensembles.
11 Plus Exam Information for Upton Hall School
Address: Upton Hall School, FCJ, Upton, Wirral, CH49 6LJ
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: uhs@uptonhall.org, 0151 677 7696
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 950 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 156
Open Day Dates: June and September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Upton Hall School 11 Plus Admissions
There are currently 165 places allocated to Year 7 pupils at Upton Hall School. Each place allocation is determined by pupil performance in an 11+ exam. A traditional school, Upton Hall encourages prospective students and their parents to attend at least one of its open days ahead of application in order to learn more about the admissions process.
Late applications will be considered, but only once places have been allocated. In cases where there are more applicants than Year 7 places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Baptised Roman Catholic girls
- Girls who have not been baptised into the Roman Catholic Church, whose parents wish them to have a Roman Catholic education
- Girls who live closest to the school
For more information about Upton Hall School’s admission process, please visit its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Upton Hall School
Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. The registration form can be downloaded via the school’s website.
For students to be considered for a Year 7 place at Upton Hall, parents must include it as a choice on their Local Authority’s Preference Form. Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. However, place allocations will not be made public until March the following year and passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.
Upton Hall School 11 Plus Exam Format
Prospective pupils to Upton Hall School must sit two multiple choice Verbal Reasoning tests at eleven plus. Each test will last approximately 50 minutes and pupils will have a break between the two papers.
Scores from both tests will be added together and students who score 236 or above will be considered for admission.
How to Prepare for the Upton Hall School 11 Plus Exam?
When it comes to the eleven plus exam, preparation is key. If, however, students have left it late to begin, read our last minute 11+ preparation article for further advice.
To give students the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at Upton Hall, they should incorporate practice papers into their study plan. Using these papers could increase a student’s chance of surpassing the required score in the exam.
Parents should encourage their daughter to sit practice papers under timed conditions, as this will vastly improve their time management skills and get them used to answering all questions under time pressure.
As the Upton Hall School entrance exam focuses on verbal reasoning, we specifically would recommend the following resources:
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
The information provided about Upton Hall School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1880, The Tiffin Girls’ School is a selective, all-girls grammar located in Kingston upon Thames in London. Situated on a nine-acre campus, the school became an academy in 2011. From Year 7 until Sixth Form, students are split into six houses: Bebbington, Flavell, Nicolle, Orford, Schofield and Watson – all named after previous Headmistresses of the school.
Pupils are encouraged to strive for excellence in everything they do, whether it’s academic achievement or an enthusiasm for arts, music or sport. Through a broad curriculum and active pastoral care, students are taught to be self-aware and to act both independently and in cooperation with others.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Tiffin Girls’ School
Address: Tiffin Girls’ School, Richmond Road, Kingston upon Thames KT2 5PL
County: London
Admissions Info: admissions@tiffingirls.org, 020 8546 0773
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,114 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: July
Exam Dates: October and November
Exam Board Type: Stage 1: Maths and English, partly multiple-choice, Stage 2: Maths and English, open answer
The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions
The Tiffin Girls’ School has reported over 10 applications for every Year 7 place and, as a result, it firmly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open evening. At this open event, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff. Admission at this stage is determined by pupil performance in a two-stage entrance exam process.
In the likely event of oversubscription at Year 7, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:
- Girls with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or an Education Health and Care Plan (EHCP), who name The Tiffin Girls’ School specifically on the Statement or EHCP
- Up to 60 girls whose score in the Stage Two Test is higher than or equal to the 250th ranked mark of all applicants who sat the Stage Two Test
- Remaining places will be allocated from all applicants who sat the Stage Two Test who have not already been awarded a place
The Tiffin Girls’ School has a strict oversubscription criteria, so parents are always advised to read the latest policy to ensure they have the most up-to-date information.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Tiffin Girls’ School
The school operates a two-stage test procedure. To register for the Stage One Test, the online Supplementary Information Form (SIF) must be completed and received by the school. The SIF is available via the school’s website when the registration window is open.
Girls who pass Stage One will be invited to sit Stage Two of the test in early November. At this stage, parents must complete their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to be eligible for consideration for a place at The Tiffin Girls’ School.
Parents who have questions about the admissions process at Year 7 should email
admissions@tiffingirls.org or the school on 020 8546 0773.
The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam Format
Parents are advised to read the admissions documents on the school’s website ahead of the 11 Plus exam itself.
Previous tests have been split into two stages:
Stage One: English and Maths, partly multiple choice, similar to both GL and CEM style
A number of pupils will then be invited back to sit the Stage Two test.
Stage Two: English and Maths, set by the school. Previous tests have included comprehension, a writing task and standard format maths questions.
How to Prepare for The Tiffin Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?
The Tiffin Girls’ School does not reveal details of its exam provider for Year 7 entrance exam testing. For parents, this can be a worry, but Exam Papers Plus can help students prepare for the various elements of the assessments.
We would recommend that students begin their exam preparation early with practice exam papers. Not only do these papers give students a general overview of their current abilities, they also enable them to identify their strengths and weaknesses.
As a student’s studying progresses, they can continue to use our practice tests to check on their progress. As the exam date gets closer, we would encourage pupils to do these practice tests under timed conditions, to get them used to working in this type of environment. Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements.
We have a selection of 11 Plus practice papers that can help students prepare for both stages of The Tiffin Girls’ School entrance exam:
STAGE 1
Based on last year’s exams, we received a lot of feedback suggesting that the first round test at Tiffin Girls’ School was very similar to the first round test used by the grammar schools in Sutton, known as the Selective Eligibility Test. Both exams consist of multiple-choice Maths and English papers with similar timings and question types. The only significant difference seems to be how answers need to be marked on the answer sheet.
As such, our full-length Sutton practice tests will provide great practice for the Tiffin first round test too:
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
If you would like further practice, we have plenty of subject and skill-specific resources that will help:
English:
11+ Verbal Reasoning (Language based)
11+ Verbal Reasoning (Synonyms + Antonyms)
Mathematics:
STAGE 2
11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11+ English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11+ English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
The information provided about The Tiffin Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded as a technical school in 1956, Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys (TWGSB) became a selective grammar school for boys in 1982. The school has a co-educational Sixth Form for those aged 16-18.
Over 1,000 students are divided across six houses and are encouraged to explore their social and cultural interests through a range of co-curricular activities.
11 Plus Exam Information for Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys
Address: Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys, St John’s Road, Tunbridge Wells TN4 9XB
County: Kent
Admissions Info: thegrammarschool@twgsboys.kent.sch.uk, 01892 529551
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,194
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)
Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
All 180 Year 7 places at Tunbridge Wells Grammar are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. Admissions are dealt with by Kent County Council, so parents should register their children directly with the local authority.
In instances where there are more applicants than Year 7 places, TWGSB uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in care, or who have previously been in care
- Children with a sibling at the school at the time of a child starting in Year 7
- Health and Special Access Reasons
- Children who live within a 3-mile radius of the school
- Children who live in the named parishes outlined here
- Nearness of all other children’s homes to the school
More information about TWGSB’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys
Parents are able to express four school preferences on a Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF), which should be returned to the Local Authority (LA).
For admission to TWGSB, applicants will need to have secured a ‘grammar’ assessment and named Tunbridge Wells Grammar on the SCAF.
Parents will be notified of the result of the offer of a school place in March by the LA.
Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
The majority of Kent’s 35 selective grammar schools and 4 partially selective schools use the Kent Test at 11 Plus for Year 7 places. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:
- An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. This includes Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
- An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
- A 40-minute writing task. This will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases.
How to Prepare for the Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
In order for your son to secure a Year 7 place at TWGSB, he will need to be well-prepared for the Kent Test. Children generally perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period of time. A ‘little and often’ approach typically works best and ensures that they don’t become overwhelmed with studying.
We recommend using practice exam papers as a way of highlighting any areas that need additional work. Don’t be afraid to introduce practice papers at the beginning of your child’s revision, as they will enable you to diagnose their strengths and weaknesses.
Pupils sitting the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys, will hugely benefit from these resources:
11 Plus Kent Practice Test 1
11 Plus Kent Practice Test 2
11 Plus Kent Practice Test 3
If your son needs additional work on a particular subject, we would also recommend the following practice exam papers:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
The information provided about Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1905, Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School (TWGGS) is a girls-only selective school in Kent. Over 1,000 pupils are taught a traditional curriculum, while building skills that will hold them in good stead for the modern world.
TWGGS has enjoyed great success in the creative arts and specialises in music with English. The school’s students also participate in a range of sporting activities, including football, curling and hockey.
11 Plus Exam Information for Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School
Address: Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, Southfield Road, Tunbridge Wells TN4 9UJ
County: Kent
Admissions Info: info@twggs.kent.sch.uk, 01892 520902
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,005 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 140
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam
Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. With 140 Year 7 places available at TWGGS, the school is often oversubscribed. In such instances, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children who receive Pupil Premium
- Children with a sister attending the school
- Children with Health and Special Access Reasons
- Eligible girls living within the parishes/towns outlined in this document
- Distance from home to school
- Governors’ places (14 places)
For more details about the school’s catchment area and its allocation of governors’ places, visit the website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School
Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11 Plus, parents need to complete an online registration form.
Once students have sat the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive results of the exam via the LA in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March of the following year.
Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Girls hoping to gain a place at TWGGS will have to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam. This is divided into the following sections:
- A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
- An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
- A 40-minute writing task. This is not marked as part of the 11+ test, but it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.
How to Prepare for the Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
To keep your daughter ahead of the competition for Year 7 entry at Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School, she must be organised, focused and prepare accordingly. Begin by creating an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects, while also allowing time for relaxation.
For the Kent eleven plus test, practice exam papers should form an integral part of your child’s revision routine, as they can help you to monitor their progress.
For children sitting the Kent Test at 11+, we have specifically designed the following practice papers:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)
For students that need further help to improve in a particular subject, we also recommend these subject-specific practice exam papers:
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
The information provided about Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in the London borough of Bexley, Townley Grammar School is a girls-only grammar for pupils aged 11-18, although its Sixth Form is co-educational. An academy school, Townley specialises in performing and visual arts, maths and computing.
The school offers a broad curriculum and an impressive array of extracurricular activities, including three choirs, two orchestras, a concert band and various musical productions.
For an insight into academic life at Townley Grammar School, watch this promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Townley Grammar School
Address: Townley Grammar School, Townley Road, Bexleyheath DA6 7AB
County: London (Borough of Bexley)
Admissions Info: admin@townleygrammar.org.uk ,020 8304 8311
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,469 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 224
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Townley Grammar School is part of the Bexley Coordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme and only students who pass the Bexley test can be considered for admission in Year 7.
The Bexley test aims to select the top academic students for entrance to the school with pass marks set by a selection panel of the school’s headteacher and assigned officers. However, it should be noted that passing the Bexley 11 Plus isn’t a guarantee of a Year 7 place at Townley Grammar School.
In cases where there are more eligible candidates than Year 7 places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Girls identified by the London Borough of Bexley as achieving one of the highest 180 scores in the selection tests and who apply for a place at Townley Grammar School
- Girls who have a sibling attending the school at the time of application
- Students with a parent or registered guardian employed at Townley Grammar School on a permanent basis at the time of application
- Up to 14 places for girls attracting Pupil Premium and/or Free School Meals who achieve the qualifying score in rank order of distance from the school
- Distance from school with priority given to pupils living nearest to the school
More information about the school’s oversubscription and admissions policies can be found here.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Townley Grammar School
To apply for Year 7 entry to Townley Grammar School, parents need to complete an online application form via their Local Authority (LA).
Parents are advised to contact the LA directly, rather than the school, with any specific admission questions.
Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Townley Grammar School eleven plus exam consists of two test papers that each last around 50 minutes. The two tests cover the following subjects:
- Verbal reasoning
- Numerical reasoning (maths)
- Non-verbal reasoning
Each test contains a mixture of standard format and multiple-choice questions, divided into timed sections.
How to Prepare for the Townley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
The key to preparing for the 11 Plus exam is organisation. The more time children have to study for the entrance tests, the better chance they’ll have of performing well. Parents should can support their child’s revision by creating a study timetable that maps out what days they will study and what topics they will cover.
In addition to working from a structured plan, we recommend using practice exam papers early in your child’s revision. Not only do practice tests help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and the types of questions they may be asked on test day.
As the exam draws closer, we’d recommend that your child takes our practice exam papers under exam conditions so that they get used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.
We specifically recommend the following resources for the Townley Grammar School 11+ exam:
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)
11 Plus Cloze (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling (CEM)
11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
The information provided about Townley Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1915, Torquay Girls’ Grammar School is a selective grammar that teaches over 800 girls, aged 11-18. In 2011, the school gained academy status, having previously been one of the first UK schools to achieve specialist status in humanities. The school consistently reports excellent exam results and is often placed in the top 20 state schools in the UK.
Alongside a packed curriculum, pupils are given the opportunity to participate in a broad extracurricular programme, which includes drama, dance and orienteering.
For an insight into life at Torquay Girls’, watch this short promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Torquay Girls’ Grammar School
Address: Torquay Girls’ Grammar School, 30 Shiphay Lane, Torquay TQ2 7DY
County: Devon
Admissions Info: admin@tggsacademy.org, 01803 613215
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 858 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Dates: June and September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Admission to Torquay Girls’ Grammar School is made through Torbay Council and all prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in the September before the year of entry.
As competition for Year 7 entry is high, the school is often oversubscribed. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:
- Children in care or adopted children
- Children eligible for the Pupil Premium at the time of the test
- Children of staff working at the school at the time of the test
- A girl with a sister at the school
- By direct line distance from home to the school at the time of application
You can find more details about Torquay Girl’s admissions process via the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Torquay Girls’ Grammar School
To secure one of the 150 Year 7 places available at Torquay Girls’ Grammar, parents need to download the registration form from the school website.
Girls will sit the 11 Plus tests in September and parents will receive the results in mid-October. Places will be officially allocated in early March.
Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Torquay Girls’ Grammar School exam consists of two CEM test papers and one English writing test.
Girls will be tested on:
- Verbal reasoning
- Numerical reasoning (maths)
- Non-verbal reasoning
There will be two papers, each lasting approximately 45-50 minutes.
The English writing test will be set by Torquay Girls’ Grammar School in collaboration with the other Torbay grammar schools and it will be marked internally.
How to Prepare for the Torquay Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
Preparing for the 11 Plus can sometimes feel overwhelming. However, with a carefully thought-out revision plan that focuses on studying ‘little and often’, students should find the process easily manageable.
Once a revision routine has been established, parents should start introducing practice exam papers into their daughter’s studying. Practice papers can help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and get them used to answering the types of questions they may be asked on the day.
To give your child the best chance of securing a Year 7 place at Torquay Girls’ Grammar School, we would recommend the following eleven plus practice tests:
11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Comprehension (CEM)
11+ Cloze (CEM)
11+ Spelling (CEM)
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
The information provided about Torquay Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1904, Torquay Boys’ Grammar School is a selective school for boys aged 11-18. Over 1100 boys are taught at the school and girls aged 16-18 are accepted into the Sixth Form. Due to a significant growth in pupil numbers, the school has undergone an extensive building programme to ensure students enjoy good quality facilities.
One of the top 20 boys’ schools in the UK, Torquay Boys’ Grammar received academy status in 2010 and became a Multi-Academy Trust in 2012. The school provides a traditional curriculum that focuses on the qualities and skills young learners need to succeed in school and beyond.
11 Plus Exam Information for Torquay Boys’ Grammar School
Address: Torquay Boys’ Grammar School, Shiphay Manor Drive, Torquay TQ2 7EL
County: Devon
Admissions Info: enquiries@tbgs.torbay.sch.uk, 01803 615501
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,120 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 156
Open Day Date: July and September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)
Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Torquay Boys’ Grammar is open to 156 pupils in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open events before applying.
In cases where there are more Year 7 applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Boys in care, or who were in care
- Boys who are eligible for the Pupil Premium
- Other boys
For further details about the school’s admission criteria at Year 7, please visit its website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Torquay Boys’ Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at Torquay Boys’ Grammar, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online.
Students that live in a different local authority from Torbay need to apply by contacting their LA directly.
Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Torquay Boys’ Grammar School exam consists of two CEM test papers and one English writing test.
The CEM tests will assess verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning (maths) and non-verbal reasoning. There will be two papers, each with approximately 45-50 minutes of timed test questions.
The English writing test will be set by Torquay Boys’ Grammar School, in collaboration with the other Torbay grammar schools and it will be marked internally.
How to Prepare for the Torquay Boys’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
Due to its formal nature, children can feel intimidated about sitting the eleven plus exam. To keep negative feelings at bay, parents should work with their child to build a good study plan so as to avoid leaving 11 Plus preparation to the last minute.
Introducing practice exam papers into your child’s study routine will prove beneficial as these will give your child a clearer idea of the structure of the exam. These practice papers should also be taken under timed conditions as this will get them used to working under time pressure as will be required in their CEM 11 Plus exam questions.
Our 11+ practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Torquay Boy’s Grammar school entrance exam. The following papers are an excellent resource for your child’s 11 Plus revision:
11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)
11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)
11 Plus Cloze (CEM)
11 Plus Spelling (CEM)
The information provided about Torquay Boys’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Located in Kent, Tonbridge Grammar School is a girls-only school. Founded in 1905 with just 19 students, today Tonbridge educates over 1,000 girls aged from 11-18. Boys are accepted into the school’s Sixth Form from age 16. The school is based within a 14-acre campus in Deakin Leas, Tonbridge.
An International Baccalaureate World School, Tonbridge Grammar mixes a traditional curriculum with a passion for learning. The school aims to produce students who are keen to make a difference in the world.
11 Plus Exam Information for Tonbridge Grammar School
Address: Tonbridge Grammar School, Deakin Leas, Tonbridge TN9 2JR
County: Kent
Admissions Info: office@tgs.kent.sch.uk, 01732 365125
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,058 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Dates: June and October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)
Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to Tonbridge Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 180 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in this entrance exam.
The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for a Year 7 place. The school holds monthly group tours from November to April and larger-scale open events in June and October. At these events, parents can ask any questions they might have about the school’s curriculum and learning environment.
In case of oversubscription, Tonbridge Grammar School gives priority to:
- Looked after children
- Children who meet the required score in the 11 Plus (135 Area places / 35 Governor places)
- Students who are eligible for Pupil Premium (10 places)
Visit Tonbridge Grammar School’s website for more information about its Year 7 admissions policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Tonbridge Grammar School
To apply for a Year 7 place at Tonbridge Grammar School, parents must first register their daughter for the Kent Test. This can be done online via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.
Once students have taken the Kent Test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit a Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF) via the LA’s website.
Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Along with the majority of selective grammar schools in Kent, Tonbridge Grammar uses the Kent Test at 11+ to allocate its 180 Year 7 places. The exam consists of tests in Reasoning, English and Maths and also includes a writing task.
The exam is divided as follows:
Part 1: Reasoning – A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three shorter sections and focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
Part 2: English and Maths – A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths section is made up of multiple-choice questions.
Part 3: Writing – This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the eleven plus test, but might be referred to in borderline or appeal cases.
How to Prepare for the Tonbridge Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
Kent is well-known as an extremely competitive grammar school area, so for your child to succeed in the Kent 11 Plus exam, they would do well to invest additional time into their revision ahead of the test date.
We always encourage students to revise ‘little and often’. Children who approach their revision sessions like this are much more likely to perform better in exams, compared with those who become overwhelmed by longer revision sessions.
As well as working from a structured revision schedule, we recommend using practice exam papers from an early stage. Practice papers enable parents to monitor their child’s learning from week-to-week and identify any strengths and weaknesses.
For students to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Tonbridge Grammar School, we would recommend starting with these practice test:
For additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 3 (GL)
Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
The information provided about Tonbridge Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
The Harvey Grammar School (HGS) is a selective school for boys aged 11–18 and is located in Folkestone, Kent. Pupils are divided across four houses at HGS: Discovery, Endeavour, Resolution and Victory.
Over 800 boys are taught a broad and balanced curriculum that aims to challenge pupils throughout their school life. In recent years, the school has worked to build a range of modern facilities where pupils can participate in extracurricular activities, including music, drama productions, and sport.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Harvey Grammar School
Address: The Harvey Grammar School, Cheriton Road, Folkestone CT19 5JY
County: Kent
Admissions Info: enquiries@harveygs.kent.sch.uk, 01303 252131
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 882 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: June and October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)
The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
The 150 Year 7 places at The Harvey Grammar School are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. All admissions are dealt with by the Local Authority (LA) and, when parents are applying, they must do so directly with Kent County Council.
The Harvey Grammar School has fixed oversubscription criteria, which is implemented in the following priority order:
- Children in Local Authority Care
- Boys who reside in the District of Shepway
- Other boys who satisfy the selection requirements, with those living nearest to the school being given the higher priority
Should a student not receive a Year 7 place at The Harvey Grammar School, parents can appeal the decision. Our guide to grammar school appeals explains the process in more detail.
More information about The Harvey Grammar School’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Harvey Grammar School
Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11 Plus, parents must complete an online registration form.
Once candidates have sat the Kent Test at eleven plus, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March of the following year.
For further information about The Harvey Grammar School’s admissions process for Year 7 entry, call the school on 01303 252131 or email at enquiries@harveygs.kent.sch.uk.
The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
For Year 7 entry, The Harvey Grammar School uses the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, split into the following format:
- An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Pupils will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
- An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
- A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.
How to Prepare for The Harvey Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
The Harvey Grammar School is generally oversubscribed in Year 7, so parents should make sure that their son makes the most of the time and resources available ahead of the exam.
Children at this age are likely to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period, rather than crammed in one or two sessions just before the test. Students that revise in short sessions over a longer period of time tend to retain knowledge better.
The Kent Test covers a number of subjects and we have created targeted resources to help with every aspect of the test. We would recommend using practice exam papers to prepare, as they will highlight any weaker areas early on. Practice papers are also a great way to monitor a student’s progress.
Pupils who are due to sit the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at The Harvey Grammar School, will benefit from these resources:
If students need to work on a particular subject area, these practice papers will prove beneficial:
Eleven Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 1 (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 2 (GL)
Eleven Plus English Pack 3 (GL)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about The Harvey Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1905, Folkestone School for Girls (FSG) is a girls’ grammar located in the Kent port town of Folkestone. An academy school, FSG teaches over 1,000 girls aged 11-18, who are split across six houses: Austen, Curie, Johnson, Lovelace, Pankhurst and Seacole.
FSG aims to provide its girls with a varied education, although its curriculum does focus on more traditional subjects. Away from the classroom, the school provides pupils with a range of extracurricular opportunities such as dance and drama productions, sporting events and a ‘young magistrates’ programme.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Folkestone School for Girls
Address: The Folkestone School for Girls, Coolinge Lane, Folkestone CT20 3RB
County: Kent
Admissions Info: 01303 251125
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1,024 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Dates: June and October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)
The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
As like many other selective grammar schools in Kent, Year 7 admission to The Folkestone School for Girls is determined by pupil performance in the Kent 11+ exam. There are currently 180 places allocated to Year 7 students. Prospective students and their parents are advised to attend one of the school’s open events; information on these events can be found on the school’s website.
In the case of oversubscription, The Folkestone School for Girls gives priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children who live in the District of Shepway
- Children who live closest to the school
Visit FSG’s website for more information about its Year 7 admissions policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Folkestone School for Girls
To apply for a Year 7 place at The Folkestone School for Girls, parents must first register their daughter for the Kent Test, this is done via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.
Once the child has sat the Kent Test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the LA’s website.
The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
The majority of selective grammar schools in Kent use the Kent Test at eleven plus to allocate Year 7 places. The exam consists of tests in Reasoning, English and Maths, and also includes a writing task.
The format is broken down as follows:
Section 1 – Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is divided into three shorter sections that focus on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
Section 2 – English and Maths: A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and 25-minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the maths section will contain multiple choice questions.
Section 3 – Writing: This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be referred to in borderline or appeal cases.
How to Prepare for The Folkestone School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
Kent is considered one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the UK. For students to have the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place, it’s advised to have a documented revision plan in place early on.
Students can maximise the time they have to revise by starting the process early and investing in the best resources available. It’s important to be organised and follow a clear revision strategy. In doing so, students will find the Kent Test much easier to understand.
Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress by choosing from our selection of online practice papers. The Kent Test at 11 Plus is focused on particular skills, so we would highly recommend the resources below, that have been specifically created for this test:
For additional subject-specific revision, we would also recommend these practice exam papers:
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about The Folkestone School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
The Crypt School was founded in 1539 and is located in Gloucester. It became an academy in 2011 and, from 2018, it is fully coeducational. Over 800 pupils are divided across five houses: Brown, Henley, Moore, Raikes and Whitefield.
The school encourages its pupils to pursue their passions outside of the classroom through an impressive range of extracurricular activities.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Crypt School
Address: The Crypt School, Podsmead, Gloucester GL2 5AE
County: Gloucestershire
Admissions Info: enquiries@crypt.gloucs.sch.uk, 01452 530291
School Type: Co-Educational (from 2018)
Number of pupils: 804 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Dates: March and June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)
The Crypt School 11 Plus Admissions
To be considered for a Year 7 place at The Crypt School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. The school’s admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who wish their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form.
With an average of five applications for every Year 7 place at The Crypt School, in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Children eligible for Pupil Premium
- Children whose parents are members of staff at the school for at least two years
- All other children
For more information about The Crypt’s admission process at Year 7, visit the school’s website directly.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Crypt School
The Crypt School uses the same eleven plus test from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring) as the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For children to be considered for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via their Local Authority (LA), as well as a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period.
To be considered for a place at The Crypt School, parents must include the school as one of their ranked choices on the CAF. Parents will receive results from the 11 Plus in October and the LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.
The Crypt School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Crypt School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:
Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.
How to Prepare for The Crypt School 11 Plus Exam?
Students who are due to sit the 11 Plus exam at The Crypt School should create a thorough revision timetable well ahead of exam day. The more prepared children are ahead of the exam, the better chance they will have of achieving a good score.
Children may need to commit time to additional revision sessions alongside their usual homework. If students are struggling to get motivated, consider introducing fun revision games.
Practice exam papers are an effective preparation tool for The Crypt School eleven plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving time management skills. The more papers that a student takes, the more familiar they will become with the types of questions they could be asked in the exam.
For The Crypt School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
- 11+ Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)
- 11+ Plus Comprehension (CEM) (Pack 1)
- 11+ Plus Cloze (CEM) (Pack 1)
- 11+ Plus Spelling
- 11+ CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning (Pack 1)
- 11+ Plus CEM Mathematics Long Numerical Reasoning (Pack 1)
- 11+ Plus CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning (Pack 1)
The information provided about The Crypt School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Sutton Grammar School is a selective grammar school for boys located in Sutton, South London. Girls are welcome to attend the school’s Sixth Form. Over 900 students aged 11-18 attend the school, which was founded in 1899.
The school challenges its pupils with a taxing curriculum, while encouraging its students to participate in a range of extracurricular activities, which include sport, music, drama, debate and a Combined Cadet Force.
11 Plus Exam Information for Sutton Grammar School
Address: Sutton Grammar School, Manor Lane, Sutton SM1 4AS
County: London (Borough of Sutton)
Admissions Info: office@suttongrammar.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8642 3821
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 930 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 135
Open Day Date: September
Exam Dates: September (part one) and October (part two)
Exam Board Type: Part One: Multiple-Choice Maths and English / Part Two: Open Answer Maths and English
Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Sutton Grammar School is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme and, as such, admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. Competition for the 150 places available in Year 7 is very high, so the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which usually take place in September. At these events, you can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.
In the likely event of Sutton Grammar School being oversubscribed in Year 7, the school applies these policies, in this priority order:
- Looked after, or previously looked after boys
- 75 places by rank order of the scores in the selection tests where the home address of the boy is in one of the postcodes (SM1-7, KT4, KT17, CR0 4–, CR4)
- 60 places (plus any remaining places in criterion 2 if the number of qualified boys in criterion 2 is less than the 75 on offer) by rank order of the scores in the selection tests from any home address
- Proximity of the boy’s home address from the school (where scores are equal)
Sutton Grammar School adheres to a strict admission policy in Year 7, so parents are advised to read the policy before applying for a place.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sutton Grammar School
Parents who wish to register their son to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Sutton Grammar School is part of the Pan-London Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme. To apply for a place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London, or Surrey, can complete the CAF online.
If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit Sutton Grammar’s Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should they pass this test, parents must include Sutton Grammar on the CAF for pupils to be eligible for consideration for a Year 7 place.
Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
In recent years, Sutton Grammar School’s eleven plus tests have been split into two stages:
- Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each last approximately 45 minutes.
This SET is run in conjunction with other local schools in Sutton. The result of the SET determines whether or not a boy is eligible for the second stage test.
- Stage 2: English and Mathematics – the English test is an extended writing task to test comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is a standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.
How to Prepare for the Sutton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
The five selective grammar schools in Sutton are particularly cautious when it comes to revealing information about their selection examinations. Because of this, and the extensive competition for places in Year 7, both children and parents can experience anxiety and stress ahead of the tests.
However, with the help of Exam Papers Plus, parents can give their son the best possible chance of securing a Year 7 place at Sutton Grammar School. By creating a revision plan early and introducing online practice papers, parents can identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
Sutton Grammar School has reported that there are over 10 applications for each Year 7 place, so for students to get ahead of the competition, we would recommend using the following practice tests, which have been specifically designed to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:
Round 1 (S.E.T)
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4
11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5
For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1
11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
Round 2
For Round 2, we would recommend the following packs:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
The information provided about Sutton Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Founded in 1929, Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls is based in Sutton Coldfield in the West Midlands. It became an academy in 2011, after previously being awarded specialist science status in 2004 and being recognised as a Beacon School.
Sutton Girls is a partner school to Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School, with the two schools partnering through the year in events such as drama performances and music productions.
11 Plus Exam Information for Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls
Address: Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls, Jockey Road, Sutton Coldfield B73 5PT
County: West Midlands
Admissions Info: enquiry@suttcold.bham.sch.uk, 0121 354 1479
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 991 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: June and September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)
Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls is a member of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. This body sets the admission criteria in the West Midlands. Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam.
As per all grammar schools in Birmingham, prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must achieve the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place.
Parents should be aware that due to oversubscription, not every girl who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place. In the likely event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria to assign places, in order of priority:
- Looked after, or previously looked after, children
- Students eligible for Pupil Premium
- Those who live closest to the school
Find out more about the school’s Year 7 admissions policy via its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls
To apply for a Year 7 place at Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls, parents must first register their daughter with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium.
Secondly, parents should complete a Local Authority (LA) preference form. On the form, parents should select up to six preferred schools. It is the responsibility of the LA to consider each application.
The loc